Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
requirements.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION SAFETY
This is how you find owner's information 14 Writing characters/words by hand on 53 Safety 58
the screen
Digital owner's manual in the car 15 Safety during pregnancy 58
Introduction to vehicle gas (Bi-Fuel)* 55
Navigating in the digital owner's manual 16 Whiplash Protection System 59
Owner's Manual in mobile devices 18 Pedestrian Protection System 60
Volvo Cars support site 19 Seatbelt 61
Reading the owner's manual 19 Seatbelt tensioner 62
Recording data 22 Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt 63
Important information on accesso- 23 Door and seatbelt reminder 64
ries, extra equipment and diagnostic
socket Airbags 65
Volvo ID 23 Driver and passenger airbags 66
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 25 Activating/deactivating the passen- 68
ger airbag*
IntelliSafe-driver support 28
Side airbag 70
Sensus - online connectivity and 29
entertainment Inflatable curtain 71
The owner's manual and the environment 32 Safety mode 72
Windows, glass and mirrors 32 Starting/moving the car after safety 72
mode
Overview of the centre display 33
Child safety 73
Operating the centre display 36
Child seats 74
Navigating in the centre display's views 40
Upper mounting points for child seats 76
Symbols in the centre display's status bar 45
Lower mounting points for child seats 77
Change settings for the centre display 46
Table for location of child seats 78
Function view with buttons for car 47 using the car's seatbelts
functions
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 80
Using the keyboard in the centre display 49
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 81
2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Table for location of i-Size child seats 84 Instruments and controls, left-hand 90 Voice recognition control of the phone 123
drive car
Integrated child seat* 85 Voice recognition control of radio 123
Instruments and controls, right-hand 91 and media
Folding up the integrated child seat 86 drive car
cushion* Voice recognition control of climate 124
Driver display 94 control
Folding down the integrated child 87
seat cushion* Driver display settings 98 Voice recognition and map navigation 125
Indicator symbols in the driver display 99 Manual front seat 126
Warning symbols in the driver display 101 Power front seat* 127
Outside temperature gauge 102 Adjusting the power front seat* 127
Clock 103 Using the memory function in the 128
Fuel gauge power front seat*
103
Fuel gauge for vehicle gas* Multi-functional front seat* 129
104
License agreement for the driver display Adjusting functions in the multi-func- 129
105 tional front seat*
Application menu in the driver display 110 Adjusting the passenger seat from 131
Using the application menu in the 111 the driver's seat*
driver display
Adjusting the head restraints in the 132
Messages in the driver display and 112 rear seat
the centre display
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 133
Managing messages in the driver 113
display and the centre display Steering wheel 135
Managing messages saved from the Adjusting the steering wheel 136
115
driver display and centre display Lighting control 137
Head-up display* 117 Headlamp levelling 139
Voice recognition 120 Position lamps 139
Using voice recognition 121 Daytime running lights 140
Settings for voice recognition 122 Dipped beam 141
3
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating/deactivating main beam 141 Programming HomeLink®* 166 Climate control 184
Active bending lights* 144 Trip computer 168 Climate control - sensors 185
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* 144 Show trip data in the driver display 170 Perceived temperature 185
Rear fog lamp 145 Show trip statistics in the centre display 171 Air quality 186
Brake lights 146 Settings in the centre display 172 Passenger compartment filter 187
Hazard warning flashers 146 Categories in the settings menu 174 Clean Zone Interior Package* 187
Using direction indicators 147 Changing system settings in the set- 175 Interior Air Quality System* 187
tings menu
Passenger compartment lighting 147 Climate controls 188
Resetting settings in the settings menu 176
Home safe light duration 150 Climate controls in the centre display 189
Driver profiles 177
Approach light duration 151 Climate controls at the rear of the 190
Selecting driver profile 177 tunnel console*
Using windscreen wipers 151
Editing a driver profile 178 Auto-regulating the climate 191
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor 152
Linking remote control key to driver 179 Activating/deactivating air conditioning 192
Windscreen and headlamp washers 153 profile
Regulating the temperature 193
Rear window wiper and washer 153 Changing settings for apps 180
Regulating the fan level 195
Power windows 154 Resetting user data for change of 181
ownership Activating/deactivating defrost of 196
Operating power windows 154 windows and door mirrors
Using the sun blind* 156 Activating/deactivating air recirculation 199
Adjusting the door mirrors 156 Air distribution 199
Interior rearview mirror 158 Changing the air distribution 200
Compass* 159 Opening/closing and aiming the air vents 201
Calibrating the compass* 160 Table of air distribution options 203
Panorama roof* 161 Activating/deactivating heating of 205
Operating the panorama roof* 162 the seats*
4
LOADING AND STORAGE LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating/deactivating heating of 207 Passenger compartment interior 220 Remote control key 238
steering wheel*
Tunnel console 220 Remote control key range 240
Parking climate* 208 Electrical sockets 222 Red Key - Restricted remote control key* 241
Starting/stopping preconditioning* 209 Using the glovebox 226 Antenna locations for the start and 242
Timer for preconditioning* 210 lock system
Sun visors 227
Setting the timer for preconditioning* 210 Locking/unlocking from the outside 243
Cargo area 227
Activating/deactivating the timer for 212 Indication on locking/unlocking the car 245
Recommendations for loading 227
preconditioning* Locking/unlocking from the inside
Load retaining eyelets 247
229
Starting/switching off climate com- 212 Deadlocks*
Bag hooks 249
fort retention* 229
Locking/unlocking the tailgate 250
Symbols and messages for parking 214 Through-load hatch in the rear seat 230
climate control* Using private locking 252
Cargo cover* 231
Heater* 215 Detachable key blade 253
Safety net* 233
Parking heater* 216 Locking/unlocking with the detacha- 254
Safety grille* 234 ble key blade
Additional heater* 217
Power operated tailgate* 255
Opening/closing the tailgate with 258
foot movement*
Replacing the battery in the remote 260
control key
Immobiliser 263
Child safety locks 264
Alarm* 265
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm* 267
Disarming the alarm* without work- 267
ing remote control key
5
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for the remote control 268 Speed-dependent steering force 278 Adaptive cruise control* 298
key system
Electronic Stability Control ESC 278 Activating and starting the Adaptive 302
cruise control*
Sport mode for electronic stability control 279
Managing the speed of the Adaptive 303
Symbols and messages for elec- 281
tronic stability control cruise control*
Setting the time interval for the 304
Speed limiter* 283 adaptive cruise control*
Activating and starting the Speed limiter 284 Deactivating/activating the Adaptive 306
Managing speed for the Speed limiter 284 cruise control*
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed 285 Overtaking assistance with adaptive 308
Limiter cruise control* or Pilot Assist*
Switching off the speed limiter 286 Change of target and automatic 309
braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control
Automatic speed limiter* 287
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* 310
Activating/deactivating the automatic 288
speed limiter Change between Cruise control and 311
adaptive cruise control*
Changing the tolerance for the Auto- 289
matic speed limiter Symbols and messages for the 313
Adaptive cruise control*
Cruise control 290
Pilot Assist* 315
Activating and starting the Cruise control 291
Managing speed for the Cruise control Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* 319
292
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* 321
293
control Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* 322
Deactivating Cruise Control 294 Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* 323
Distance Warning* 295 Change of target and automatic 325
Activating and setting the time inter- 296 braking with Pilot Assist*
val for Distance warning* Limitations of Pilot Assist* 327
Limitations of Distance Warning* 297 Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 328
6
Radar unit 330 Road Sign Information with Speed 367 Park assist lines and fields for the 393
Warning and Settings park assist camera*
Limitations of the radar unit 332
Road Sign Information with Speed 368 Starting the Park assist camera* 395
Type approval for radar units 336 Camera Information*
Camera unit Limitations for park assist camera* 396
340 Limitations of Road Sign Information* 369
Limitations of the camera unit Symbols and messages for Park 398
341 Driver Alert Control 370 assist camera*
City Safety 344 Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 371 Park Assist Pilot* 400
Setting the warning distance for City 347 Limitations of Driver Alert Control
Safety 372 Parking with Park Assist Pilot* 401
Lane Keeping Aid 372 Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 404
Detection of obstacles with City Safety 348
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid 375 Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 407
City Safety in cross traffic 350
Symbols and messages for lane 376
City Safety when evasive manoeu- 351 assistance
vres are prevented
Assistance upon risk of collision 378
Limitations of City Safety 352
Symbols and messages for assis- 379
Messages for City Safety 355 tance upon risk of collision
Rear Collision Warning 356 Steering assistance upon risk of lane 380
BLIS* 356 departure
Activate/deactivate BLIS* 358 Steering assistance upon risk of 382
head-on collision
Limitations of BLIS* 358
Steering assistance upon risk of 383
Cross Traffic Alert* 359 rear-end collision*
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* 360 Park Assist* 385
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 361 Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot* 387
Messages for BLIS* and Cross 363 Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 388
Traffic Alert*
Symbols and messages for Park 390
Road Sign Information* 364 Assist Pilot*
Sign display with Road Sign Information 365 Park assist camera* 391
7
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock* 410 Emergency brake lights 434 Towing bracket* 451
Bypass of the alcohol lock* 410 Brake assistance 434 Extendable/retractable towing brackets* 451
Before starting the engine with the 410 Auto braking after a collision 434 Towing bracket specifications* 453
alcohol lock
Parking brake 435 Driving with a trailer 454
Ignition positions 411 Using the parking brake 436 Trailer lamps 456
Starting the car 412 In the event of a fault in the parking 437 Trailer Stability Assist* 457
Switching off the car 413 brake
Towing eye 458
Steering lock 414 Hill start assist 438
Towing 459
Using jump starting with another battery 414 Automatic braking when stationary 439
Recovering the car 460
Gearbox 415 Driving in water 440
Gear positions for automatic gearbox 416 Overheating in the engine and drive 440
system
Manual gearbox 418
Overloading the starter battery 441
Gear shift indicator* 418
Preparations for a long trip 442
Gear selector inhibitor 420
Winter driving 442
Changing gear with steering wheel 421
paddles* Opening/closing the fuel filler flap 443
and refuelling
Start/Stop 422
Filling vehicle gas* 445
Using the Start/Stop function 422
Button for gas operation* 445
Conditions for the Start/Stop function 424
Handling of fuel 446
Drive modes* 426
Petrol 447
Drive mode ECO 428
Diesel 448
Level control* and shock absorption 431
Empty tank and diesel engine 449
All-wheel drive* 431
Diesel particulate filter 449
Brake functions 432
Economical driving 450
Foot brake 432
8
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Audio and media 462 Using Apple CarPlay* 478 Terms and conditions for services 507
and Customer Privacy Policy
Apps 462 Settings for Apple CarPlay* 479
Audio settings 463 Android Auto* 479
Radio 464 Settings for Android Auto* 481
Changing and searching radio stations 464 Technical specifications for media 481
RDS radio 466 Phone 483
Digital radio 467 Connect phone 484
Linking between different radio 467 Connecting/disconnecting the phone 485
bands FM and DAB
Managing phone calls 486
Settings for radio 468
Managing text messages 487
Media player 469
Managing the phone book 488
Media playback 469
Settings for phone 489
Gracenote® 472
Settings for text messages 489
Searching media 472
Bluetooth® settings 489
CD player* 473
Online car* 490
Media via Bluetooth® 473
Connecting the car 490
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® 474
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot 492
Media via USB port 474 No or poor connection 493
Connecting a device via USB port 474 Remove Wi-Fi network 494
video 475 Wi-Fi technologies and security 494
Audio settings for media 475 Settings for car modem* 494
TV* 476 Downloading, updating and uninstal- 495
Using the TV* 476 ling apps
Apple CarPlay* 477 License agreement for audio and media 497
9
WHEELS AND TYRES MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Tyres 510 Dimension designation for tyre 531 Volvo service programme 534
Tyres' rotation direction 511 Car status 534
Tread wear indicators on the tyres 512 Book service and repair 534
Checking the tyre pressures 512 Inspection and service of the system 537
for vehicle gas*
Tyre monitoring* 513
Remote updates 537
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre 515
monitoring system* System updates 538
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre 516 Raise the car 539
monitoring*
Opening and closing the bonnet 541
Calibrating tyre monitoring* 517 Engine compartment overview 542
Emergency puncture repair kit 518 Engine oil 543
Using the emergency puncture repair kit 519 Checking and filling with engine oil 544
Inflate tyres with the compressor 522 Topping up coolant
from the emergency puncture repair kit 545
Servicing the climate control system 547
When changing wheels 523
Bulb replacement 547
Removing a wheel 524
Replacing the dipped beam bulb 549
Fitting the wheels 525
Replacing the main beam lamp 550
Wheel bolts 526
Replacing daytime running light 551
Spare wheel* 526 bulb/position lamp bulb, front
Winter wheels 527 Replacing the front direction indica- 551
Tool kit 528 tor bulb
Warning triangle 529 Replacing the reversing lamp bulb 552
Jack* 529 Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb 553
First aid kit 530 Bulb specifications 553
Dimension designation for wheel rim 530 Wiper blades in service position 554
10
SPECIFICATIONS ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Replacing a wiper blade 555 Type designations 584 Alphabetical Index 607
Filling washer fluid 556 Dimensions 587
Starter battery 557 Weights 589
Symbols on the batteries 560 Towing capacity and towball load 590
Support battery 560 Engine specifications 592
Fuses 562 Engine oil — specifications 593
Replacing a fuse 563 Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 595
Fuses in engine compartment 564 Coolant — specifications 596
Fuses under glovebox 567 Transmission fluid — specifications 596
Fuses in cargo area 571 Brake fluid — specifications 596
Cleaning the exterior 575 Fuel tank - volume 597
Polishing and waxing 577 Air conditioning — specifications 597
Rustproofing 578 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 599
Cleaning the interior 578 Approved wheel and tyre sizes 602
Cleaning the centre display 580 Load index and speed rating 604
Paint damage 581 Approved tyre pressures 605
Repairing paint damage 581
11
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This is how you find owner's The car's centre display1 Printed information
information In the centre display, drag down There is a supplement to the
Owner's information is available in several differ- the top view and tap on owner's manual1 in the glove-
ent product formats, both digital and printed. Owner's manual. Available box that contains information
The owner's manual is available in the car's cen- here are options for visual navi- on fuses and specifications, as
tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo gation with exterior and interior well as a summary of important
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a images of the car. The informa- and practical information.
supplement to the owner's manual available in tion is searchable and is also There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor- divided into categories. format that helps you to get started with the most
mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's commonly used functions in the car.
manual can be ordered. Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play, Depending on equipment level selected, market,
search for "Volvo Manual", etc. additional owner's information may also be
download the app to your available in printed format in the car.
smartphone or tablet and select
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
the car. Available in the app are
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
video tutorials and options for
order.
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi- Changing the language in the car's
gate between the different sections in the centre display
owner's manual and the content is searchable. Changing the language in the centre display may
Volvo Cars support site mean that some owner's information does not
Go to support.volvocars.com correspond to national or local laws and regula-
and select your country. Here tions. Don't change to a language that's difficult
you can find owner's manuals, to understand, it may then be difficult to find your
both online and in PDF format. way back in the structure on the screen.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car owner-
ship. The page is available for most markets.
1A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
14
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT Digital owner's manual in the car the owner's manual. One way is from the top
A digital2 version of the owner's manual is availa- menu, with a tap on .
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
ble in the car's centre display.
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
ble laws and regulations are followed. It is Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
also important that the car is maintained and manual menu
handled in accordance with Volvo's recom- Leads to the start page of
mendations in the owner's information. the Owner's Manual.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the prin-
ted information then it is always the printed
information that applies.
Articles grouped by cate-
Related information gory. The same article may
• Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15) appear in several catego-
• Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18) The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
ries.
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 19) view.
• Reading the owner's manual (p. 19) To open the digital owner's manual - drag down
the top view in the centre display and tap on Leads to a Quick Guide
Owner's manual. page with links for a selec-
tion of articles that can be
NOTE particularly useful to read.
Provides answers to com-
The digital owner's manual is not available
mon questions about the
while driving.
car.
15
INTRODUCTION
|| Symbols and their meaning in the owner's Symbols and their meaning in the owner's Navigating in the digital owner's
manual menu manual menu manual
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
Exterior and interior over- Leads to short video tutori- from the centre display in the car. The content is
view images of the car. Dif- als for different functions in searchable and it is easy to navigate between
ferent parts are designated the car. different sections.
with hotspots that lead to
articles about those parts
of the car.
16
INTRODUCTION
}}
17
INTRODUCTION
|| Start page Owner's Manual in mobile devices in the owner's manual and the content is search-
Tap on the symbol to go back The owner's manual is available as a mobile able.
to the start page in the owner's app3 from both the App Store and Google Play.
manual. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
18
INTRODUCTION
Volvo Cars support site ments and warranties. Here there is also informa- Reading the owner's manual
More information on your car is available on the tion about accessories and software adapted for A good way of getting to know your new car is
Volvo Cars website and support site. your car model. to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Support on the Internet Related information
• Volvo ID (p. 23) Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
become familiar with new functions, get advice
support site is available for most markets.
on how best to handle the car in different situa-
It contains support for functions such as web- tions and learn how to make the best use of all
based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the the car's features. Please pay attention to the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and step- safety instructions contained in the owner's man-
by-step instructions explain different procedures, ual.
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a Development work is constantly underway in
mobile phone. order to improve our product. Modifications may
Downloadable information mean that information, descriptions and illustra-
tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip-
Maps ment in the car. We reserve the right to make
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there modifications without prior notice.
is the facility to download maps from the support
page. Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob-
lems should arise then the necessary information
Owner's manuals as PDF about where and how to seek professional help
Owner's manuals are available for download in will be missing.
PDF format. Select car model and model year to
download the manual as required. © Volvo Car Corporation
Contact Options/accessories
The support site contains contact details to cus- In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
tomer support and your nearest Volvo dealer. manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
Log in to Volvo Cars website extra equipment).
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is
asterisk: *.
possible to get an overview of service, agree-
}}
* Option/accessory. 19
INTRODUCTION
|| The equipment described in the owner's manual Message texts Risk of property damage
is not available in all cars - they have different There are displays in the car that show menu and
equipment depending on adaptations for the message texts. In the owner's manual the
needs of different markets and national or local appearance of these texts differs from the normal
laws and regulations. text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard Phone, New message.
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Decals
Special texts The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
WARNING have the following descending degree of impor-
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of tance for the warning/information.
injury.
Warning of personal injury
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
IMPORTANT
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
damage. property.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
The owner's manual contains information in cer-
tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot- Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
tom of the page or at the end of a table. This text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
information is an addition to the text that it refers cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
table then letters are used instead of numbers fatality.
for referral.
20
INTRODUCTION
21
INTRODUCTION
Recording data driving conditions. Similarly, the system never Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- information being disclosed to third parties with-
certain information about the vehicle's operation, graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
functionality and incidents are recorded in the uation. However, other parties, such as the police, national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
car. could use the recorded data in combination with forced to disclose information of this nature to
the type of personally identifiable information the police or other authorities who may assert a
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special legal right to access such. Special technical
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- equipment and access to either the vehicle or the equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
ter and record data related to traffic accidents or EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- entered into agreements with Volvo have access
collision-like situations, such as times when the tered data. to is required to be able to read and interpret the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor-
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
in the road. The data is recorded in order to mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv-
number of computers designed to continually
increase understanding of how vehicle systems icing and maintenance, is securely stored and
check and monitor the function of the car. They
work in these types of situations. The EDR is managed and that its management complies with
can record data during normal driving conditions,
designed to record data related to vehicle relevant legal requirements. For further informa-
but in particular register faults affecting the vehi-
dynamics and safety systems for a short time, tion - contact a Volvo dealer.
cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa-
usually 30 seconds or less.
tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record City Safety and the auto brake function).
data related to the following in the event of traffic
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
accidents or collision-like situations:
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
• How the various systems in the car worked and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi-
• Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts cle. The registered information is also needed to
were fastened/tensioned enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Informa-
• The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
pedal
puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
• The travel speed of the vehicle
In addition to the above, the registered informa-
This information can help us better understand tion can be used in aggregate form for research
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- and product development with the aim of contin-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. cars.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
22
INTRODUCTION
4 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
5 If you have Volvo On Call*. }}
* Option/accessory. 23
INTRODUCTION
|| With the Volvo ID app 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically Advantages of Volvo ID
1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download sent to the specified email address. • One user name and one password to access
Centre in the centre display's app view. > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read online services, i.e. only one username and
below to learn how to register the ID to one password to remember.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address. the car. • If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically Registering your Volvo ID to the car changed automatically for other services.
sent to the specified email address. If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
> A Volvo ID has now been created and Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol- Related information
automatically registered to the car. lows: • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
Volvo ID services can now be used. 1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID (p. 495)
On Volvo Cars website app from Download Centre in the app view. • Connecting the car (p. 490)
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in6 using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo NOTE
ID. To download apps, the car must be con-
2. Enter a personal email address. nected to the Internet.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address. 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read email address.
below to learn how to register the ID to 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
the car. sent to the email address linked to your
With Volvo On Call mobile app7 Volvo ID.
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App Volvo ID services can now be used.
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's
start page and enter a personal email
address.
24 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure products and solutions in order to reduce the
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on negative impact on the environment.
the development of safer and more efficient
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val- inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air Fuel consumption
ues and influences all operations. The environ- outside thanks to the climate control system. Since a large part of a car's total environmental
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
the car and takes into account the environmental Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
product developed must have less impact on the sumption in each of their respective classes.
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
environment than the product it replaces. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
Volvo's environmental management work has impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
resulted in the development of more effective that environmental laws and regulations in force
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
environment is also important to Volvo - the air partners must also meet these requirements.
}}
25
INTRODUCTION
26 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Related information
• Drive modes* (p. 426)
• The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 32)
• Economical driving (p. 450)
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 599)
• Air quality (p. 186)
* Option/accessory. 27
INTRODUCTION
IntelliSafe-driver support does not react to the warning and the risk of col- • City Safety (p. 344)
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept concerning lision is imminent then City Safety can automati- • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 372)
car safety. It comprises a number of systems, cally brake the car.
• Seatbelt (p. 61)
both standard and optional, that contribute to Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* is another example of a
making a car journey safe, to the prevention of function that helps to prevent accidents by warn-
• Safety (p. 58)
injuries and to the protection of passengers and ing the driver and giving corrective steering inter- • Airbags (p. 65)
other road users. ventions if the car is about to cross a lane side • Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
line.
Support • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
There are systems incorporated in IntelliSafe that Also available is the steering assistance function, ture (p. 380)
help the driver to drive the car in a safe manner. whose purpose is to reduce the risk of the car • Whiplash Protection System (p. 59)
The driver support functions incorporated in the unintentionally leaving the road and actively steer
car include e.g. adaptive cruise control*, which the car back onto the road.
ensures that a constant distance is held between
the car and the vehicle in front. Protection
To protect the driver and passengers, the car is
Pilot Assist* helps the driver to keep the car equipped with seatbelt tensioners which can ten-
between the lane's edge markings, combined sion the seatbelts in critical situations and in col-
with maintaining a preset time interval to the lisions. It also has airbags and inflatable curtains,
vehicle ahead. as well as Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver park the car by which protects against whiplash injuries.
sensing the area around it. A Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is also
Other examples of systems that help the driver available for mitigating a pedestrian's impact with
are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert the car in the event of a frontal collision.
(CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* sys- Related information
tems.
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
Prevention • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
An example of a function that helps to prevent
• Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 141)
accidents is City Safety. The function warns the
driver of risks of collision with another vehicle, • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
pedestrians, cyclists or larger animals. If the driver (p. 360)
• BLIS* (p. 356)
28 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory. 29
INTRODUCTION
||
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
30 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Many of the main functions of the car are con- • Driver display (p. 94)
trolled from the centre display, a touch screen • Voice recognition (p. 120)
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini- • Online car* (p. 490)
mal. The screen can even be operated while • Audio and media (p. 462)
wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the cli-
mate control system, the entertainment system
and seat position*. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
8-inch driver display.
Voice recognition system
The driver display shows information on speed The voice recognition system
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being can be used without the driver
played. The display is operated via the two steer- needing to take his/her hands
ing wheel keypads. off the steering wheel. The sys-
Centre display tem can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to, for example, play back a
song, call someone, increase the temperature or
read out a text message.
Related information
• Operating the centre display (p. 36)
• Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
• Head-up display* (p. 117)
* Option/accessory. 31
INTRODUCTION
The owner's manual and the Windows, glass and mirrors • Using windscreen wipers (p. 151)
environment The car contains controls for windows, glass • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 153)
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi- and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are
nating from controlled forests. reinforced with lamination, which makes the pas-
senger compartment more soundproof, amongst
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol other things.
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or Laminated glass
other controlled sources. The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina-
ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides
better protection against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
Laminated glass is available as an option for cer-
tain other glass surfaces.
8 Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
32 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
}}
33
INTRODUCTION
||
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively9.
Function view - car functions that are acti- tions are also so-called trigger functions, ting options. Examples of such are Camera
vated/deactivated with a press. Certain func- which means they open a window with set- and parking functions. Settings for the head-
34
INTRODUCTION
up display* are also made from the function Extra subview - recently used apps/car func-
view, but adjustments are made using the tions that do not belong in any of the other
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Home view - the first view that is shown Climate row - information and direct interac-
when the screen is started. tion to set temperature, seat heating level*
Application view (app view) - apps that have and fan speed. Tap on the symbol in the cen-
been downloaded (third-party apps) and tre of the climate row in order to open the
apps for embedded functions, such as FM climate view with more setting options.
radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Related information
Status bar - the activities in the car are • Operating the centre display (p. 36)
shown right at the top of the screen. Net-
work/connection information is shown on the
• Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
left-hand side of the status bar, while media-
related information, the clock and indication • Function view with buttons for car functions
about on-going background activity are (p. 47)
shown on the right. • Changing settings for apps (p. 180)
Top view - drag the tab down in order to • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
access the top view. Settings, Owner's (p. 45)
manual, Profile and the car's saved mes-
• Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
sages are accessed from here.
• Head-up display* (p. 117)
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview • Media player (p. 469)
to expand it. • Phone (p. 483)
Media - recently used apps associated with • Climate controls in the centre display
media. Tap on the subview to expand it. (p. 189)
Phone - the phone function can be reached • Cleaning the centre display (p. 580)
from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.
* Option/accessory. 35
INTRODUCTION
Operating the centre display views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov- IMPORTANT
Many of the car's functions are controlled and ing apps can be performed by touching the
screen in different ways. Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
regulated from the centre display. The centre
they may scratch it.
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch. An infrared film enables the screen to detect a
finger that is just in front of the screen. This tech-
Using the touch screen functionality in nology makes it possible to use the screen even
The table below presents the different proce-
the centre display with gloves on.
dures for operating the screen:
The screen reacts differently depending on Two people can interact with the screen at the
whether you press, drag or swipe across it. same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
Actions such as browsing between different and passenger side respectively.
36 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the
screen.
}}
* Option/accessory. 37
INTRODUCTION
|| Turn off the screen and reactivate it 2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the NOTE
home button.
In home view standard mode - briefly press
> The view that was displayed before the
the home button. An animation that describes
screen was switched off will be shown
access to the different views is shown on the
again.
screen.
NOTE
Moving apps and buttons for car
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
functions
prompt to perform an action is shown on the
The apps and buttons for car functions in the app
screen.
view and function view respectively can be moved
and organised as desired.
NOTE 1. Tap on an app/button and hold depressed.
Home button for the centre display.
The centre display deactivates automatically > The app/button changes size and
When the centre display is switched off, the when the engine is off and the driver's door is becomes slightly transparent. It is then
screen is dimmed so as not to be disruptive opened. possible to move it.
whilst driving. The climate row will still be visible,
and apps and other functions connected to the 2. Drag the app/button to a vacant space in the
screen will continue to run. Returning to home view from another view.
view The maximum number of rows available for use in
1. Give a long press on the physical home but-
1. Briefly press the home button. order to position apps/buttons is 48. To move an
ton below the screen.
> The last position of the home view is app/button outside the visible view, drag it to the
> The screen goes dark except for the cli-
shown. bottom of the view. New rows are then added,
mate row, which continues to be shown.
2. Briefly press again. where the app/button can be located.
All functions continue to run, such as cli-
mate control, audio, guiding* and apps. In > All subviews of the home view are set to An app/button can thus be located further down
this mode, the screen can be cleaned with their default mode. and is then not visible in the normal mode for the
the cloth supplied; see the section view.
"Cleaning the centre display". Swipe across the screen to scroll upward/down-
ward in the view.
38 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
NOTE Using the controls in the centre display • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 495)
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
moving them to the bottom, off the visible • Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
apps you use more often. • Change settings for the centre display
(p. 46)
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's func-
tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
• drag the control to the desired temperature,
• tap on +/− in order to raise/lower the tem-
perature gradually, or
• tap on the desired temperature on the con-
trol.
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it Related information
is possible to scroll in the view. • Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
• Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
• Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 29)
• Remote control key range (p. 240)
39
INTRODUCTION
Navigating in the centre display's An app/car function selected from the app/func- NOTE
views tion view starts in the respective subview of the
home view. For example FM radio starts in the The first time the car is used, some of the
There are five different basic views in the centre
Media subview. home view's subviews have no content.
display: home view, top view, climate view, appli-
cation view (app view) and function view. The The extra subview contains the last used app/car
screen is started automatically when the driver's function that is not associated with any of the NOTE
door is opened. other three areas. In home view standard mode - briefly press
The subviews show brief information about each the home button. An animation that describes
Home view different app. access to the different views is shown on the
Home view is the view that is shown when the screen.
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub-
view.
40
INTRODUCTION
}}
41
INTRODUCTION
|| Expanding a subview: When a new subview is opened in full-screen home view's standard view from full screen mode
mode, no information from the other subviews is - press twice on the home button.
– For subview one, two and three: Press any-
shown.
where on the subview. When a subview is Status bar
expanded, the fourth subview in the home In expanded mode, open the The activities in the car are shown at the top of
view is temporarily forced away. The other app in full screen - press on the screen. Network/connection information is
two are minimised and only certain informa- the symbol. shown on the left-hand side of the status bar,
tion is shown. When the fourth sub view is while media-related information, the clock and
pressed, the other three subviews are mini- indication that background activity is in progress
mised and only certain information is dis- are shown on the right.
played.
Press on the symbol to go back Top view
The expanded view provides access to the to the expanded mode, or press
basic functions of the app. the home button at the bottom
Closing an expanded subview: of the screen.
42
INTRODUCTION
In the top view, access is always available to: view. Press on the contextual setting to Application view
access settings that are related to the con-
• Settings tent that is shown on the screen. E.g. press
• Owner's manual Navigation Settings - settings that are
• Profile related to navigation are shown.
• The car's saved messages. • When the contextual owner's manual is avail-
In the top view, access is given to the following in able, it is shown to the right of Owner's
some cases: manual in the top view. Press on the con-
textual owner's manual to access articles in
• Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation the digital owner's manual that are related to
Settings) the content that is shown on the screen. E.g.
• Contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation press Navigation Manual - an article that is
Manual). related to navigation opens.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
the home button or at the bottom of the top view For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi- possible to access app-specific articles or set-
ble and available for use again. tings, for example.
Climate view
NOTE The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
The top view is not available during starting/ the screen. The most common climate settings
shutdown or when a message is shown on can be made directly there, such as setting tem-
perature, seat heating and fan. Application view with the car's apps.
the screen. It is also not available when cli-
mate view is shown. Press the symbol in the centre of the Swipe from right to left10 across the screen in
climate row to open the climate view order to access the application view (app view)
Contextual setting and owner's manual and gain access to more climate set- from the home view. Apps that have been down-
Drag the top view down when an app (e.g. navi- tings. loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
gation) is running: functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Cer-
Press the symbol to close the climate tain apps show brief information directly in the
• When contextual setting is available, it is view and return to the previous view.
shown to the right of Settings in the top
10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}
43
INTRODUCTION
|| app view, such as the number of unread text Function view Depending on the amount of functions, it is also
messages for Messages. possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the
subview to which it belongs, such as Media. Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated/deactivated by
Depending on the amount of apps, it is possible
pressing the relevant function button. Some func-
to scroll downward in the app view. Do this by
tions (trigger functions) open in a new window
swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
when pressed.
To move an app:
Just as in app view, it is possible to move the
1. Tap on the app and hold depressed. function buttons around and arrange them in the
> The app becomes slightly transparent and desired order.
larger when it is ready to be moved.
Related information
2. Drag the app to the desired location. • Operating the centre display (p. 36)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
NOTE
• Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
• Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)
left to right10 across the screen, or by pressing • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
the home button.
The function view with buttons for different car func- (p. 45)
tions.
• Climate controls in the centre display
Swipe from left to right10 across the screen in (p. 189)
order to access the function view from the home
view. From here you can activate/deactivate dif-
ferent car functions, e.g. Lane Departure
Warning, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
44 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Symbols in the centre display's Symbol Specification • Messages in the driver display and the centre
status bar display (p. 112)
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in Car modem activated.
the centre display's status bar.
USB sharing active.
The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are Process in progress.
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
status bar. Timer for preconditioning active.
45
INTRODUCTION
Change settings for the centre all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in
display which the background is light and the text is dark.
The centre display is started automatically when This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day-
the driver's door is opened. The settings can be light.
changed for the centre display to personalise This alternative is always available for the user
sound and themes. The screen can be switched and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
off so as not to be disruptive whilst driving.
Related information
Switching off/changing the system • Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
sounds volume in the centre display.
• Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
The system sounds volume in the centre display ment (p. 29)
can be adjusted or switched off:
• Cleaning the centre display (p. 580)
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display. • Operating the centre display (p. 36)
46
INTRODUCTION
Function view with buttons for car basic views. Navigate to the function view from Different types of buttons
functions home view by swiping from left to right across There are three different types of buttons for car
All the buttons for car functions are located in the screen11. functions; see below:
the function view, one of the centre display's
11 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}
47
INTRODUCTION
Related information
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
• Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
• Categories in the settings menu (p. 174)
48
INTRODUCTION
}}
49
INTRODUCTION
||
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.
50
INTRODUCTION
Row of suggested words or characters12. entry, all letters are automatically lower case Changing the keyboard language
The suggested words are adjusted as new unless otherwise set with the button. To make it possible to switch between different
letters are being entered. Browse among the Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then languages for the keyboard, the languages must
suggestions by pressing on the right and left first be added under Settings.
shown with numbers. Press , which in
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
number mode is shown instead of , to Adding/deleting languages in settings
that this function is not supported by all lan-
return to the letter keyboard, or to The keyboard is automatically set to the same
guage selections. If not available, the row will
open the keyboard with special characters. languages as the system language. The keyboard
not be shown on the keyboard.
language can be manually adapted without
The characters available on the keyboard Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The affecting the system language.
depend on which language was selected available characters and word suggestions
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it. (1) vary depending on the selected language. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
One long press opens a list of languages 2.
The button works in different ways, depend- Press System System Languages and
and then tap on the language to be used. A
ing on the context in which the keyboard is Units Keyboard Layouts.
short press changes to the next language on
used - either to enter @ (when an email
the list without showing the list. To add addi- 3. Select one or more languages from the list.
address is entered) or to create a new row
tional languages in the keyboard - see the > It is now possible to switch between the
(for normal text input).
heading "Changing keyboard language" selected languages directly from the key-
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the below.
button is not shown. board for text input.
Space.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to If no languages have been actively selected
enter one capital letter and then continue Undoes entered text. Press briefly to delete under Settings, the keyboard uses the same lan-
with lower-case letters. Another press makes one character at a time. Hold the button guage as the car's system language; see the
all letters capital letters. The next press depressed to delete characters more quickly. section "Changing system settings in the set-
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. tings menu".
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, characters by hand instead. Read more in the
exclamation mark or question mark is a capi- section "Writing characters/letters by hand
tal letter. The first letter in the text field is on the screen".
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for
Press the confirmation button above the key-
names or addresses, each word automatically
board (not visible in the image) to confirm the
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
entered text. The appearance of the button dif-
password, web address or email address
fers depending on context.
51
INTRODUCTION
52
INTRODUCTION
}}
53
INTRODUCTION
|| Deleting/changing characters/letters written Changing row in the free text field with Related information
by hand handwriting • Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
• Managing text messages (p. 487)
• Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 175)
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping Change row by hand by drawing the above character in
across the handwriting field (1). the handwriting field14.
– There are several options for deleting/ Entering a space in the free text field with
changing characters/letters: handwriting recognition
• Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
• Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
• Swipe horizontally from right to left13 over
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
• Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right15.
all of the entered text.
13 For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
14 For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
15 For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
54
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory. 55
SAFETY
SAFETY
58
SAFETY
cle as they drive (which means that they must be Whiplash Protection System WARNING
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer- Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces
ing wheel). The aim should be to position the Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists yourself. Volvo recommends that an author-
seat with as large a distance as possible between of energy-absorbing backrests and seat cush- ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
abdomen and steering wheel. ions, and specially designed head restraints in
If the front seats have been subjected to a
the front seats.
Related information major load, such as in conjunction with a colli-
• Safety (p. 58) WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the
seats' protective properties may have been
• Seatbelt (p. 61) collision, where the angle and speed of the colli-
lost even if they do not appear damaged.
sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
• Manual front seat (p. 126)
have an influence.
• Power front seat* (p. 127)
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back-
rests are lowered backward and the seat cush-
ions move downward to change the seating posi-
tion of the driver and front seat passenger. Its
movement helps to absorb some of the forces
that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
}}
* Option/accessory. 59
SAFETY
60 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Related information
• Safety (p. 58)
61
SAFETY
62 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Fastening a seatbelt
1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
• if it is pulled out too quickly
• during braking and acceleration The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over
the arm).
• if the car leans heavily.
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
Press together the seat mounting and move the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in shoulder.
the seatbelt up or down.
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has Position the belt as high as possible without
locked. it chafing against your throat.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).
}}
63
SAFETY
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not Visual reminder in the roof console.
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury. A visual reminder is given in the roof console and
by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis-
play.
Unfastening a seatbelt
1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle Graphics in the driver display with different types of The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
and then let the belt retract. warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is driving time and distance.
dependent on the vehicle's speed.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in The belt status of the driver and passengers is
The driver display's graphics show which seats in shown in the driver display graphics when a belt
by hand so that it does not hang loose.
the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas- is buckled or unbuckled.
Related information sengers.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
• Seatbelt (p. 61) The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail- reminder system.
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 62) gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
Front seat
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 64) The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if
keypad. either of them is not wearing one.
64
SAFETY
}}
65
SAFETY
|| WARNING Driver and passenger airbags process, including inflation and deflation of the
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems equipped with airbags on the driver and passen-
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust ger sides in the front seat. NOTE
created when the airbags are deployed can The detectors react differently depending on
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten- the nature of the collision and whether or not
sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin positions.
burns. It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
Related information detectors sense the force of the collision on
• Safety (p. 58) the vehicle and the action is adapted accord-
ingly so that none, one or more airbags are
• Driver and passenger airbags (p. 66)
deployed.
• Side airbag (p. 70)
• Inflatable curtain (p. 71)
Driver and passenger airbags1. WARNING
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
to protect the head, face and chest of the driver diminish the protection provided by the airbag
and passenger as well as the knees and legs1 of in the event of a collision.
the driver.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag possible with their feet on the floor and backs
cushions the initial collision impact for the occu- against the backrest.
pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire
66
SAFETY
WARNING WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo Do not put objects in front of or above the
workshop should be contacted for repair. dashboard where the passenger airbag is
Defective work in the airbag system could located.
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
Label for passenger airbag
Driver airbags
Airbag in the steering wheel
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag1 Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover The warning label for the passenger airbag is
panel is marked AIRBAG. positioned as shown above.
WARNING WARNING
Do not place or attach any object on the top Label on the passenger side's sun visor. If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
or front of the panel where the knee airbag is vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
stowed. bag will always be activated.
Passenger airbag
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
67
SAFETY
Related information
• Airbags (p. 65)
• Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 68)
68 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Activating the passenger airbag 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- Deactivating the passenger airbag
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
(B) to ON (A). (A) to OFF (B).
> The driver display shows the message > The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge. > A text message and a warning symbol in acknowledge.
the roof console indicate that the airbag
for the front passenger seat is activated.
NOTE NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/ WARNING If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I deactivated with the car in ignition position I
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
or lower, a message is shown in the driver passenger seat when the airbag is activated. or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's The passenger airbag must always be acti- console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition vated when front-facing passengers (children electrical system has been set in ignition
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger
position II. seat. position II.
}}
69
SAFETY
|| 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- Related information Side airbag
hand steering wheel keypad's O button. • Driver and passenger airbags (p. 66) The side airbags on the driver and passenger
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 62) seats protect the chest and hip in the event of a
collision.
• Child seats (p. 74)
70
SAFETY
71
SAFETY
72
SAFETY
}}
73
SAFETY
NOTE
When using child safety products it is impor-
tant to read the installation instructions Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
included.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is
NOTE sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
Never leave a child seat unsecured in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear-
for the child seat, even when it is not in use. facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas-
senger seat.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of chil-
dren in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
74 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
WARNING Installation in the front seat • The outer seats are equipped with upper
• When fitting rear-facing child seats, check mounting points. Volvo recommends that
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of that the passenger airbag is deactivated. child seat's upper straps should be pulled
the front passenger seat. through the hole in the head restraint before
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
• When fitting front-facing child seats, check
being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
passenger seat if the airbag is activated. that the passenger airbag is activated.
is not possible, follow the recommendations
Front-facing passengers (children and adults) • Only use child seats that are recommended from the child seat manufacturer.
must never sit on the front passenger seat if by Volvo, are universally approved or are
the passenger airbag is deactivated. semi-universal, and where the car is included • If the child seat is equipped with lower
on the manufacturer's vehicle list. straps, never adjust the position of the seat
Failure to follow the advice given above can in front after the straps have been fitted in
endanger life or lead to serious personal • ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when the lower mounting points. Always remember
injury. the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console2 to remove the lower straps when the child
accessory. seat is not installed.
Child seat installation • If the child seat is equipped with lower
The following points are important to consider straps, Volvo recommends that the lower Label for passenger airbag
when a child seat is being fitted in the car. mounting points are used with these2.
• The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
WARNING facilitate child seat installation.
Booster cushions/child seats with steel Installation in the rear seat
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
• Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally. semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in • A child seat with support legs must not be
springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp fitted in the centre seat.
edges may damage the straps.
• The outer seats are equipped with the
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Do not allow the upper section of the child ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i-
seat to rest against the windscreen. Size3.
75
SAFETY
76 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Lower mounting points for child The mounting points in the front seat are only
seats mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
The car is equipped with lower mounting points to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
seat.
Related information
• Child seats (p. 74)
• Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 76)
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 80)
• Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 78)
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
• Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
The mounting points in the front seat are located bag* (p. 68)
on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.
* Option/accessory. 77
SAFETY
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
child seats) child seats)
Group 0
UA, B X UB UB
max 10 kg
Group 0+
UA, B X UB UB
max 13 kg
Group 1
LC UFA, D U, LC U
9-18 kg
Group 2
LC UFA UE, F, B*, G, LC UE
15-25 kg
78 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
child seats) child seats)
Group 3
X UFA UF, H, B*, G UH
22-36 kg
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
C Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192); Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
D Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
E Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type
approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
F Volvo recommends: Römer KidFix XP (type approval E1 04301312).
G Volvo recommends: Integrated child seat (type approval E5 04220).
H Volvo recommends: booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169).
Related information
• Child seats (p. 74)
• Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 76)
• Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 81)
* Option/accessory. 79
SAFETY
80
SAFETY
Table for location of ISOFIX child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE
seats with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list. Always read the section "Child seats" before
The table gives a recommendation for which
fitting a child seat in the car.
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air- Front seat (with activated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child
seats)B seats)B
Group 0
E Rear-facing infant seat ILB, C, XD X ILC X
max 10 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
Group 0+
C Rear-facing child seat ILB, C, E, XD X ILC X
max 13 kg
D Rear-facing child seat
}}
81
SAFETY
|| Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air- Front seat (with activated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child
seats)B seats)B
A Front-facing child seat
B Front-facing child seat X ILB, E, F, XD ILF, IUFF X
Group 1
B1 Front-facing child seat
9-18 kg
C Rear-facing child seat
ILB, E, XD X ILG X
D Rear-facing child seat
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
D Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
E Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not touch the child seat.
F Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
G Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X3 ISOfix (type approval E5 04200).
82
SAFETY
Related information
• Child seats (p. 74)
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 80)
• Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 84)
• Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 78)
83
SAFETY
Table for location of i-Size child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE
seats with UN Reg R129.
Always read the section "Child seats" before
The table gives a recommendation for which i-
fitting a child seat in the car.
Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear- Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
facing child seats) ing child seats)
i-Size child seats X X i-UA X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Related information
• Child seats (p. 74)
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 80)
• Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 81)
• Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 78)
84
SAFETY
Integrated child seat* • the seatbelt does not lie across the child's • Folding down the integrated child seat cush-
The integrated child seats on the outer positions throat or below the shoulder ion* (p. 87)
in the rear seat allow children to sit comfortably • the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
and safely. low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec-
tion.
The child seat is especially designed to provide
good safety for the child together with the car's
seatbelt. The seat cushion can be raised in two WARNING
positions depending on the weight of the child. Volvo recommends that repair or replacement
of the integrated child seat is only performed
The child seat is approved for children weighing by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not
between 15 and 36 kg and at least 95 cm tall. make any modifications or additions to the
child seat. If an integrated child seat has been
subjected to a heavy load, e.g. in connection
with a collision, then the seat cushion, seat-
belt and backrest, or possibly the whole seat,
must be replaced. Even if the child seat
appears to be undamaged, it may not afford
the same level of protection. This also applies
if the seat cushion was in lowered position
during a collision or similar. The seat cushion
must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child seat
Correct position, the seatbelt must pass over the shoul- are not followed then the child could sustain
der. serious injury in the event of an accident.
Check before driving that:
• the seat cushion is raised to the correct posi- Related information
tion for the child's weight • Child safety (p. 73)
• the seat cushion is locked in position • Folding up the integrated child seat cushion*
(p. 86)
• the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
* Option/accessory. 85
SAFETY
Lower position: Press the seat cushion backwards to lock. Lift up the front of the seat cushion and
press it back against the backrest to lock.
Upper position, start from the lower position:
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child seat
are not followed then the child could sustain
serious injury in the event of an accident.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from the upper position to the lower position.
From the upper position, the seat cushion
must first be fully lowered into the rear seat,
Pull the handle forward and up in order to and then folded up to the lower position.
release the seat cushion.
Press the button to release the seat cushion.
86 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from the upper position to the lower position.
From the upper position, the seat cushion
must first be fully lowered into the rear seat,
and then folded up to the lower position.
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the seat cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the child
seat's seat cushion before lowering.
NOTE
Before the rear backrest is lowered, the child
seat's seat cushion must be lowered first.
* Option/accessory. 87
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Display/function/control
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox* Centre display
90 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Parking brake
Related information
Automatic braking when stationary • Steering wheel (p. 135)
• Manual front seat (p. 126)
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 127)
• Lighting control (p. 137)
• Climate controls (p. 188)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
Display/function/control rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Memory for setup of: Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
• Power front seat*
• Door mirrors Head-up display*
* Option/accessory. 91
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Display lighting, unlocking the tailgate, Panorama roof* Drive mode control*
opening/closing the tailgate*
Display in roof console Parking brake
Bonnet opening
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir- Automatic braking when stationary
Horn ror
Steering wheel adjustment
Display/function/control
Display/function/control
Memory for setup of:
Centre display
• Power front seat*
Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/ • Door mirrors
heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
door opening
• Head-up display*
Door opening, locking/unlocking of side
Gear selector
doors and tailgate
92 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Display/function/control
Power windows, door mirrors
Related information
• Steering wheel (p. 135)
• Manual front seat (p. 126)
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 127)
• Lighting control (p. 137)
• Climate controls (p. 188)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
* Option/accessory. 93
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display the
information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
safety systems may not be shown. In which
case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
and information.
Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Status of the Start/Stop function
94 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory. 95
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Distance to empty tank Status of the Start/Stop function App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Outside temperature gauge – Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicator and warning symbols – OdometerB
– – Trip meter
– – Indicator and warning symbols
– – Voice recognition
– – Engine temperature gauge
– – Messages, in some cases with graphics
96 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
The centre of the driver display contains a • Driver display settings (p. 98)
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif-
• Indicator symbols in the driver display
ferent types of message. It can show an indicator (p. 99)
or warning symbol, or consist of an image
sequence that starts from this position and is • Warning symbols in the driver display
then converted to a larger image to clarify infor- (p. 101)
mation. • Application menu in the driver display
(p. 110)
• Fuel gauge (p. 103)
• License agreement for the driver display
(p. 105)
97
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Driver display settings 3. Select what should be shown in the back- 2. Tap on System System Languages and
Settings for the driver display can be made in ground: Units System Language to select lan-
the driver display's application menu and in the • Show no information in background guage.
centre display's Settings menu.
• Show information for current playing > A change will affect the language in all
Settings in the app menu media displays.
In the app menu, you can choose which informa- • Show navigation even if no route is Related information
tion is shown on the driver display from set1. • Driver display (p. 94)
• trip computer The 12-inch driver display* shows the infor- • Application menu in the driver display
• media player mation in the centre, and the 8-inch driver (p. 110)
display shows the information in the top
• phone
right-hand field.
• Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
• navigation system*.
Selecting theme
The application menu in the driver display is 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
opened and navigated using the steering wheel's view.
right-hand keypad, see the section "Using the
application menu in the driver display". 2. Tap on My Car Displays Display
Themes
Settings in the centre display
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
Selecting information type display:
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view. • Glass
2.
• Minimalistic
Press My Car Displays Driver
Display Information. • Performance
• Chrome Rings.
Selecting language
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
1 The map is only shown with 12-inch driver display*. In the 8-inch driver display, only guidance is shown. For more information, see the section "Displays and controls for map navigation" and "Map navigation in
the driver display".
98 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
99
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
100
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
101
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
102
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
• Driver display (p. 94) Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display.
Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display. The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
• Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
In the centre display, the clock is located at the quantity of fuel in the tank.
top right of the status bar. When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
In certain situations, messages and information refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
may cover the clock in the driver display. changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates distance to empty tank, see the section
Settings for time and date "Trip computer".
Select Settings System Date and Time
in the centre display's top view to change set-
tings for time and date format.
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down
arrow on the touch screen.
}}
103
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Fuel gauge for vehicle gas* When the vehicle gas tank is empty the switch
A car with the Bi-Fuel engine alternative has a sounds 3 times. The level gauge extinguishes
separate fuel gauge for vehicle gas. and the system automatically changes over to
petrol.
NOTE
Ensure that the petrol tank never runs dry
because the car always starts on petrol.
Related information
• Filling vehicle gas* (p. 445)
Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display. • Button for gas operation* (p. 445)
The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity
of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and Markings above the button show the current fuel
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also level.
indicates distance to empty tank, see the section
"Trip computer". When the fuel level is critically Number of Colour of Fuel level (%)
low, only one amber-coloured bar remains. Refuel LEDs LEDs
the car as soon as possible.
5 Green 81-100
Related information 4 Green 61-80
• Trip computer (p. 168)
• Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu- 3 Green 41-60
elling (p. 443) 2 Green 21-40
1 Green 11-20
1 Red 0-10
104 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
License agreement for the driver 4. Neither the name of the University nor the Redistribution and use in source and binary
display names of its contributors may be used to forms, with or without modification, are permitted
A license is an agreement for the right to oper- endorse or promote products derived from provided that the following conditions are met:
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone this software without specific prior written
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
else's entitlement according to the terms and permission.
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions in the agreement. The following text is THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE conditions and the following disclaimer.
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel- REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
2. Redistributions in binary form must
oper. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" of conditions and the following disclaimer in
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
License the documentation and/or other materials
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 provided with the distribution.
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
The Regents of the University of California. All REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE 3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the
rights reserved. FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, names of its contributors may be used to
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL endorse or promote products derive from this
Redistribution and use in source and binary
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, software without specific prior written
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR permission.
provided that the following conditions are met:
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
1. Redistributions of source code must retain OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
the above copyright notice, this list of CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
conditions and the following disclaimer. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
2. Redistributions in binary form must OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
of conditions and the following disclaimer in THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
the documentation and/or other materials ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
provided with the distribution. DAMAGE. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
3. All advertising materials mentioning features DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
or use of this software must display the
License (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
following acknowledgement: This product
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
contributors. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
}}
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
105
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, all encourage inclusion and use of free
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR software in commercial and freeware
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; products alike. As a consequence, its main
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER points are that: o We don't promise that this
DAMAGE. CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, software works. However, we are be
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR distribution) o You can use this software for
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF whatever you want, in parts or full form,
reserved. THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
Redistribution and use in source and binary ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote
forms, with or without modification, are permitted DAMAGE. this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
provided that the following conditions are met: in a program, you must acknowledge
The views and conclusions contained in the
somewhere in your documentation that
1. Redistributions of source code must retain software and documentation are those of the
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
the above copyright notice, this list of authors and should not be interpreted as
We specifically permit and encourage the
conditions and the following disclaimer. representing official policies, either expressed or
inclusion of this software, with or without
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
2. Redistributions in binary form must modifications, in commercial products,
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list FreeType Project License provided that all warranty or liability claims
of conditions and the following disclaimer in 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
the documentation and/or other materials Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
provided with the distribution. Introduction The FreeType Project is the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE distributed in several archive packages; some `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS of them may contain, in addition to the originally distributed by the authors (David
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED FreeType font engine, various tools and Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED contributions which rely on, or relate to, the Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FreeType Project. This license applies to all named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A files found in such packages, and which do refers to the licensee, or person using the
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN not fall under their own explicit license. The project, where `using' is a generic term
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER license affects thus the FreeType font including compiling the project's source code
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY engine, the test programs, documentation as well as linking it to form a `program' or
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, and makefiles, at the very least. This license `executable'. This program is referred to as `a
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG program using the FreeType engine'. This
106
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
license applies to all files distributed in the that you understand and accept all the terms `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
original FreeType archive, including all source of this license. `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
code, binaries and documentation, unless 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related
otherwise stated in the file in its original, source and binary forms, with or without to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org
unmodified form as distributed in the original modification, are permitted provided that the Discusses general use and applications of
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a following conditions are met: o Redistribution FreeType, as well as future and wanted
particular file is covered by this license, you of source code must retain this license file additions to the library and distribution. If you
must contact us to verify this. The FreeType (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, are looking for support, start in this list if you
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David deletions or changes to the original files haven't found anything to help you in the
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. o devel@freetype.org
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as documentation. The copyright notices of the Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE unaltered, original files must be preserved in design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS' all copies of source files. o Redistribution in o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, binary form must provide a disclaimer that FreeType web page, which will allow you to
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, states that the software is based in part of download our latest development version and
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, the work of the FreeType Team, in the read online documentation. You can also
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND distribution documentation. We also contact us individually at: David Turner
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. encourage you to put an URL to the <david.turner@freetype.org> Robert Wilhelm
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE FreeType web page in your documentation, <robert.wilhelm@freetype.org> Werner
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE though this isn't mandatory. These conditions Lemberg <werner.lemberg@freetype.org>
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY apply to any software derived from or based
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF on the FreeType code, not just the Libpng License
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not unmodified files. If you use our work, you This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
signed this license, you are not required to must acknowledge us. However, no fee need your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
accept it. However, as the FreeType project be paid to us. between this copy and the notices in the file
is copyrighted material, only this license, or png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
another one contracted with the authors, 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
the latter shall prevail.
grants you the right to use, distribute, and and contributors may not be used to endorse
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or or promote products derived from this
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate software without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require,
that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials: }}
107
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and Tom Lane The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
LICENSE: The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
If you modify libpng you may insert additional disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
notices immediately following this sentence. Willem van Schaik including, without limitation, the warranties of
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
distributed according to the same disclaimer and disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
following individuals added to the list of which may result from the use of the PNG
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following Reference Library, even if advised of the
individuals added to the list of Contributing Contributing Authors:
possibility of such damage.
Authors John Bowler
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
Simon-Pierre Cadieux Kevin Bracey modify, and distribute this source code, or
Eric S. Raymond Sam Bushell portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
Gilles Vollant Magnus Holmgren
1. The origin of this source code must not be
and with the following additions to the disclaimer: Greg Roelofs misrepresented.
There is no warranty against interference with Tom Tanner 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as
your enjoyment of the library or against such and must not be misrepresented as
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy being the original source.
or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, For the purposes of this copyright and license, altered from any source or altered source
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following distribution.
set of individuals: The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, Andreas Dilger
the use of this source code as a component to
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
Dave Martindale supporting the PNG file format in commercial
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
Guy Eric Schalnat products. If you use this source code in a product,
license as libpng-0.96, with the following
acknowledgment is not required but would be
individuals added to the list of Contributing Paul Schmidt appreciated.
Authors:
Tim Wegner
108
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF misrepresented as being the original
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A software.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND 3. This notice may not be removed or altered
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL from any source distribution.
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR SGI Free Software B License Version
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION 2.0.
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0,
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION Sept. 18, 2008)
of the Open Source Initiative. WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
April 15, 2002 zlib License hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year> obtaining a copy of this software and associated
MIT License <copyright holders> documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> the Software without restriction, including without
This software is provided 'as-is', without any limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to express or implied warranty. In no event will the
any person obtaining a copy of this software and publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
authors be held liable for any damages arising of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
associated documentation files (the "Software"), from the use of this software.
to deal in the Software without restriction, the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
including without limitation the rights to use, Permission is granted to anyone to use this following conditions: The above copyright notice
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, software for any purpose, including commercial including the dates of first publication and either
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, applications, and to alter it and redistribute it this permission notice or a reference to http://
and to permit persons to whom the Software is freely, subject to the following restrictions: oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
furnished to do so, subject to the following all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
1. The origin of this software must not be
conditions: misrepresented; you must not claim that you THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
The above copyright notice and this permission wrote the original software. If you use this WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
notice shall be included in all copies or software in a product, an acknowledgment in EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
substantial portions of the Software. the product documentation would be LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
appreciated but is not required. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
marked as such, and must not be
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
}}
109
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, Application menu in the driver App Functions
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, display
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis- Trip com- Selection of trip meter, selection
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE play provides quick access to commonly used puter of what to show in the driver dis-
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE functions for certain apps. play, etc.
SOFTWARE.
Media Selection of active source for
Except as contained in this notice, the name of player the media player.
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use Phone Calling a contact from the call
or other dealings in this Software without prior list.
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. Navigation Pause guide, start guide to
Related information recently used destination, etc.
• Driver display (p. 94)
Related information
• Driver display (p. 94)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
• Using the application menu in the driver dis-
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead play (p. 111)
of using the centre display.
The app menu is shown in the driver display and
is controlled using the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad. The app menu makes it easy to
switch between different apps or functions within
the apps without having to let go of the steering
wheel and take your eyes off the road.
110
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Using the application menu in the Opening/closing the app menu Related information
driver display – Press on open/close (1). • Application menu in the driver display
The application menu (the app menu) in the (p. 110)
(It is not possible to open the app menu
driver display is operated with the steering while there is an unacknowledged message • Managing messages in the driver display and
wheel's right-hand keypad. in the driver display. The message must be the centre display (p. 113)
confirmed before the app menu can be
opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
selected.
111
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
112
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Message Specification The centre display shows messages that are of Managing messages in the driver
lower priority for the driver. display and the centre display
Time for main- Shown at the next service
date. Most messages are shown above the centre dis- Messages in the driver display and centre dis-
tenance
play's status bar. After a while, or when any play are managed with the steering wheel's
Regular main- Time for regular service - required action related to the message has been right-hand keypad and in the centre display's
tenance contact a workshopB. taken, the message disappears from the status views.
Maintenance Shown when the service bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi-
date has passed. tioned in the top view in the centre display.
overdue
Message composition may vary and they can be
Temporarily A function has been tem- shown together with graphics, symbols or a but-
offA porarily switched off and is ton for activating/deactivating a function linked
reset automatically while to the message.
driving or after starting
again. Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the form
A Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen. of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have
B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. higher priority than messages shown in the sta-
tus bar and require acknowledgement/action
Centre display before they disappear. Messages that need to be
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
display.
Related information
• Driver display (p. 94)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
• Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 113)
• Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 115)
}}
113
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain one
or more buttons for acknowledging the message
or accepting a request, for example.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate between the different buttons that
are available by tapping on left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2). Message in the centre display.
> The message disappears from the driver Some messages in the centre display have a but-
display. ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for
114
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to Managing messages saved from Reading a saved message
the message. the driver display and centre display To read a saved message immediately:
Managing a new message Whether saved from the driver display or the – Press the button to the right of the Car
For messages with buttons: centre display, messages are managed in the message stored in Car Status
centre display. application message in the centre display.
– Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically Messages saved from the driver display > The saved message is shown in the Car
after a while. status app.
> The message disappears from the status To read a saved message later:
bar.
1. Open the Car status app from the app view
For messages without buttons: in the centre display.
– Close the message by tapping on it, or allow > The app is opened in the bottom subview
the message to close automatically after a of the home view.
while. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app.
> The message disappears from the status > A list of saved messages is shown.
bar.
3. Press on the arrow to the right to maximise/
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned minimise a message.
in the top view in the centre display.
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app. > More information on the message is
Related information Messages that are shown in shown in the list and the image to the left
• Messages in the driver display and the centre the driver display and that need in the app shows information about the
display (p. 112) to be saved are added in the message graphically.
• Managing messages saved from the driver Car status app in the centre
display and centre display (p. 115) display. The message Car
message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
}}
115
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Managing a saved message Messages saved from the centre – Press the button to perform the action.
In maximised mode, some messages have two display Saved messages in the top view are deleted
buttons available to book service or read the automatically when the car is switched off.
owner's manual.
To book service for a saved message: Related information
• Messages in the driver display and the centre
– In maximised mode for the message, press display (p. 112)
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment6 for help in booking service.
• Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 113)
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
With Call to make Appointment: The
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work. Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view
To read the owner's manual for a saved mes-
of the centre display.
sage:
Reading a saved message
– In maximised mode for the message, press
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
Owner's manual to read about the mes-
sage in the owner's manual. > A list of saved messages is shown. Mes-
sages with an arrow to the right can be
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
maximised.
display and shows information linked to
the message. 2. Press on the arrow to maximise/minimise
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automat-
ically each time the engine is started. Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/
deactivating a function linked to the message.
6 Depending on market.
116
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory. 117
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| NOTE Activating/deactivating the head-up The setting can be saved as a personal setting in
display the driver profile.
Certain visual defects may cause headaches
Press the Head-up display
and a feeling of stress during the use of the
button in the centre display
head-up display.
function view.
NOTE
When City Safety* is activated, the informa- NOTE
tion in the head-up display is replaced by a Activation/deactivation and adjustment of the
graphic for City Safety. This graphic is illumi- head-up-display can only be performed when
nated even if the head-up display is switched it shows a projected image. The car's engine
off. must be running.
118 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Confirm
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions. The
brightness is also affected by the adjustment of
1. Press the Head-up display adjustments the brightness in the car's other displays.
button in the centre display function view.
The height position can be stored in the memory
2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of
function of the power* front seat.
the projected image in the driver's field of
vision using the steering wheel's right-hand Calibrate the horizontal position
Rotate anticlockwise
keypad. The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display Rotate clockwise
unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro-
jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock- Confirm
wise.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top Cleaning
view. Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean
and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly mois-
2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up ten the microfibre cloth.
Display Options Head-Up Display Never use strong stain removers. A special clean-
Calibration. ing agent available from Volvo dealers can be
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with used for more difficult cleaning.
the steering wheel's right keypad.
When replacing the windscreen
Reducing the brightness Cars with head-up display are equipped with a
Increasing the brightness special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected image.
}}
* Option/accessory. 119
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
120 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 121
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
122
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Voice recognition control of the this function to work, the car must be con- Voice recognition control of radio
phone11 nected to the Internet. and media13
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or Related information Command for voice recognition control of radio
dictate brief messages with voice control com- and media player.
• Voice recognition (p. 120)
mands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
• Using voice recognition (p. 121) Tap on and say one of the following com-
To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice • Settings for voice recognition (p. 122) mands:
recognition command must include contact infor-
mation that is entered in the phone book. If a • Connecting the car (p. 490) • "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone radio and shows examples of commands.
numbers then the number category can also be • "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin selected artist.
Smith Mobile". • "Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
Tap on and say one of the following com- song.
mands: • "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
• "Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
album.
from the phone book.
• "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
• "Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel.
number.
• "Recent calls" - displays the call list.
• "Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
the selected radio channel.
• "Read message" - message is read out. If
• "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected
there are several messages - select which
radio frequency in the current frequency
message should be read out.
band. If no radio source is active, the FM
• "Message to [contact]" users are reques- band is started by default.
ted to say a brief message. The message is
then repeated aloud and the user can
• "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the
choose to send12 or revise the message. For selected frequency band.
123
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| • "Radio" - starts FM radio. Voice recognition control of climate • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
• "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. control14 activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
• "Radio AM" - starts AM radio. Voice recognition commands for the climate • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
control system to e.g. change temperature, acti- activates/deactivates the air circulation.
• "DAB " - starts DAB radio.
vate a heated seat* or change fan level. • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
• "TV" - starts playback from TV*. - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows
Press and say one of the following com-
• "CD" - starts playback from CD*. and door mirrors.
mands:
• "USB" - starts playback from USB. • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
• "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
• "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. control and shows examples of commands. max defroster.
• "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue-
• "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
tooth-connected media source. • "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
the desired temperature. electric defroster" - activates/deactivates
• "Similar music" — plays back music similar
• "Raise temperature"/"Lower the heated windscreen*.
to the music currently playing back from USB
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
devices.
setting one step. defroster" - activates/deactivates the
Related information • "Sync temperature" - synchronises the heated rear window and door mirrors.
• Voice recognition (p. 120) temperature for all climate zones in the car • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
• Using voice recognition (p. 121) with the temperature set for the driver's side. steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac-
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 122) • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the tivates the heated steering wheel*.
desired air flow.
• "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
• "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
the desired air flow. setting for the heated steering wheel* one
• "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes step.
the air flow to Max/Off. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
• "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - - activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
raises/lowers the fan level one step. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
• "Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate raises/lowers the setting for the heated
regulation. seat* one step.
124 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
• "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat Voice recognition and map • "Go to [Post code]" - Specifies a post
ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat navigation15 code as a destination. Example "Drive to 1 2
ventilation*. Several navigation system functions can be acti- 3 4 5".
• "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat vated with voice commands. • "Go to [contact]" - Specifies an address
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for from the phone book as a destination. Exam-
the ventilated seat* one step. Tap on and say one of the following com- ple "Drive to Robyn Smith".
mands:
Related information • "Search [POI category]" - Searches for
• Voice recognition (p. 120) • “Navigation” - Initiates a navigation dialogue adjacent points of interest (POI) within a cer-
and shows examples of commands. tain category (e.g. restaurants)16. To have the
• Using voice recognition (p. 121)
• "Take me home" - Guidance is given to the list sorted along the route - say "Along the
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 122) Home position. route" when the results list is shown.
• Climate control (p. 184) • "Go to [City]" - Specifies a city as a desti- • "Search [POI category] in [City]" -
nation. Example "Drive to London". Searches for points of interest (POI) within a
certain category and city. The results list is
• "Go to [Address]" - Specifies an address sorted according to the city's centre point.
as a destination. An address must contain Example "Search for restaurant in London".
city and street. Example "Drive to 5 King
Street". • "Search [POI name]". Example "Search
Hyde Park".
• "Add intersection" - Starts a dialogue
where two streets must be specified. The • "Change country/Change state17, 18" -
intersection point of the specified streets Changes the search area for navigation.
then becomes the destination. • "Show favourites" - Shows favourited posi-
tions in the driver display.
• "Clear itinerary" - Erases all the stored
intermediate destinations and final destina-
tion in an itinerary.
* Option/accessory. 125
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| • "Repeat voice guidance" - Repeats the Manual front seat Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
last spoken guidance. The car's front seats have different setting the control up/down.
• "Turn off voice guidance" - Switches off options for optimum seating comfort. Change the backrest rake by turning the
voice guidance. control knob.
• "Turn on voice guidance" - Starts the
switched-off voice guidance. WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
Related information setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
• Voice recognition (p. 120) the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
• Using voice recognition (p. 121) personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 122)
Related information
• Power front seat* (p. 127)
• Multi-functional front seat* (p. 129)
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
ion* by pumping up/down. (p. 205)
Change the length* of the seat cushion by • Seatbelt (p. 61)
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting
the handle and adjusting the distance to the
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.
126 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Power front seat* Adjusting the power front seat* Related information
The car's front seats have different setting Set to desired sitting position using the control • Power front seat* (p. 127)
options for optimum seating comfort. The power on the front seat's seating section. • Using the memory function in the power
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/ front seat* (p. 128)
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be
raised/lowered and the backrest rake can be • Multi-functional front seat* (p. 129)
changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted • Seatbelt (p. 61)
upward/downward/forward/backward.
* Option/accessory. 127
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Using the memory function in the 3. Within three seconds, depress the 1 or 2 WARNING
power front seat* button.
The memory function stores settings for the seat, > When the position has been stored in the • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
door mirrors, and head-up display*. selected memory button an acoustic sig-
be left unattended in the vehicle.
nal sounds and the light indicator in the M
It is possible to store two different settings with button extinguishes. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
the memory function. The memory function key- at any time by pressing any button on the
pad is located either on one front door or both*. If none of the memory buttons is depressed power seat control panel.
within three seconds then the M button extin-
guishes and no storing takes place. • Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new • Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
memory can be set.
128 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Multi-functional front seat* the screen. When it is possible to show setting Adjusting functions in the multi-
Enhance the seating comfort using the multi- options for both the front seats, the driver's set- functional front seat*
function control. ting options are shown in the upper half and the Both the multi-function control on the seat and
passenger's in the lower half. the centre display can be used in order to
To stop showing the seat settings view in the change the settings. The range of settings is
centre display, press the home button, which is shown in the centre display*.
located under the centre display.
Related information
• Power front seat* (p. 127)
• Adjusting functions in the multi-functional
front seat* (p. 129)
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 205)
}}
* Option/accessory. 129
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning Restarting massage Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
the control upward/downward. The seat set- The massage function is deactivated automati- front seat
tings view will be shown on the centre dis- cally after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/
play. manually. downward/forward/backward.
2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. – Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre To adjust the lumbar support:
3. To choose between the different massage display, to restart the selected massage pro-
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
functions, select either directly in the touch gram.
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
screen or by moving the cursor up/down > The massage program restarts. If no tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
using the multi-function control's upper/ action is taken, the message remains play.
lower button. Change the setting in the shown in the top view.
selected function by selecting directly in the 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.
It is not possible to use the massage function
touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by when the engine is switched off. • Press the seat button up/down to move
using the multi-function control's front/rear the lumbar support up/down.
button. Adjusting side support* in the front seat
• Press the front seat button in order to
Settings for massage
backrests increase the lumbar support.
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro-
The following setting options are available for • Press the rear seat button in order to
vide side support.
massage: decrease the lumbar support.
To adjust the side support:
• On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch Extending the seat cushion in the front
on/off the massage function. 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set- seat
• Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the
programs. Select between Swell, Tread, tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play. multi-function control on the seat.
Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
• Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and the control upward/downward. The seat set-
High. view.
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
• Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and • Press the front seat button in order to play.
Fast. increase the side support.
• Press the rear seat button in order to
reduce the side support.
130 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- Adjusting the passenger seat from
tings view. the driver's seat*
• Press the front seat button in order to The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
extend the seat cushion. the driver's seat.
• Press the rear seat button in order to Activating the function
retract the seat cushion. The function can be activated in two ways via the
centre display:
Related information
• Multi-functional front seat* (p. 129) Via the function view
• Managing messages saved from the driver Press the Adjust passenger
display and centre display (p. 115) seat button to activate.
3. Select Adjust Passenger Seat From • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 127)
Driver Position to activate. • Seatbelt (p. 61)
* Option/accessory. 131
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Adjusting the head restraints in the Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
rear seat outer head restraints*
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward
visibility.
132 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory. 133
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| IMPORTANT If the car is equipped with electronic* folding of To lower the backrest manually:
the rear seat there are buttons located in the
The seat cushion on the integrated child cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered
seat* must be in lowered position before low- manually.
ering the rear seat backrest.
The armrest* for the centre seat must be WARNING
raised before lowering the seat. Pay attention that people are not at risk of
If the car has private locking, the tailgate must being trapped during the automatic folding of
be closed before lowering the seat. the rear seat. Since this takes place automati-
cally on the press of a button, no one must be
on or too close to the rear seat.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for- To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted be stationary and the tailgate open.
1. Lower the centre head restraint manually .
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can For electronically controlled folding of backrests:
be fully folded forward. 2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and
1. Ensure that there are no occupants or
objects in the rear seat. right-hand rear seat backrests forward .
Lowering the backrest 3. The backrest disengages from the lock and
2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man-
Car with electronic folding ually. is automatically lowered to the horizontal
position.
3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The
buttons are marked L and R for left and Car without electronic folding
right-hand backrest sections respectively. If the car is only equipped with manual lowering
of rear seat:
4. The backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position. The head restraints are 1. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man-
also lowered automatically. ually.
2. Pull forward the handles that are fitted in the
car's left and right-hand rear seat backrests.
3. The seat is released from the lock but
remains in the same position. Lower the
backrest to the horizontal position.
134 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
• Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
(p. 132)
The horn is located in the centre of the steering
wheel.
Related information
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 136)
Controls for driver support systems19.
• Activating/deactivating heating of steering
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in wheel* (p. 207)
an automatic gearbox. • Speed limiter* (p. 283)
Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis- • Cruise control (p. 290)
play settings, and menu, message and phone
handling.
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
• Distance Warning* (p. 295)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
• Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 421)
• Voice recognition (p. 120)
19 Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*. }}
* Option/accessory. 135
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
• Head-up display* (p. 117) Adjusting the steering wheel regulated according to the car's speed in order to
give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
• Using the application menu in the driver dis- The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
play (p. 111) positions. With knee airbag
• Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 113)
• Phone (p. 483)
136 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
137
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Position Specification Thumbwheel in the instrument panel height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is
heavily laden.
Daytime running lights and position
For different load cases and settings, see the
lamps.
section "Headlamp levelling".
Dipped beam and position lamps in
weak daylight or darkness, or when Related information
the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog • Passenger compartment lighting (p. 147)
lamp are activated. • Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 141)
The Active main beam function can • Ignition positions (p. 411)
be activated. • Position lamps (p. 139)
Main beam can be activated when • Headlamp levelling (p. 139)
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used. Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness
138 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
139
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| running lights are switched on. The driver should Daytime running lights The car automatically changes lighting from day-
turn to a position other than . The car has sensors that detect the light condi- time running light to dipped beam in weak day-
tions in the surroundings. The daytime running light or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also
Related information lights are switched on when the rotating ring on takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
• Lighting control (p. 137)
the stalk switch is in position , or
lamp are activated.
• Ignition positions (p. 411) as well as when the car's electrical system At stationary when the car is running, the posi-
is in ignition position II or when the car is run- tion lamps are switched on instead of other light-
ning. In position , the headlamps change ing, if the rotating ring is moved to the position
automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or for position lamps, , from another position.
darkness.
WARNING
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord-
ance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
• Lighting control (p. 137)
• Dipped beam (p. 141)
• Ignition positions (p. 411)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
140 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Dipped beam Dipped beam is always switched on when the Activating/deactivating main beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position Main beam is activated with the stalk switch.
in the position, dipped beam is activated when the car's electrical system is in igni-
Active main beam is activated with the rotating
automatically in weak daylight or darkness. tion position II or when the car is running.
ring on the stalk switch.
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
switch must be in mode for tunnel detec-
tion to work.
Related information
• Daytime running lights (p. 140)
• Lighting control (p. 137)
}}
* Option/accessory. 141
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| 25 or . Activate main beam by moving detects the headlamp beams from oncoming Activate/deactivate
the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. The function can start while driving in the dark
the stalk switch backwards. If the active main beam has adaptive functional- when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx.
12 mph) or higher.
When main beam has been activated the ity27 then, unlike what happens during conven-
symbol illuminates in the driver display. tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- Activate/deactivate active main beam by turning
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- the stalk switch's rotating ring to position
Active main beam ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the and release. If active main beam is deactivated
Active main beam is a function which uses a light beam that points directly to the vehicle is while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately
camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen dimmed. reset to dipped beam.
to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and
then switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen-
sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or
vehicles ahead.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
ond after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards
rear lights from vehicles in front. oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both When active main beam is activated, the symbol
Car with LED26 headlamps* sides of the vehicle. illuminates with a white glow in the driver
If the active main beam has the on/off functional- The lighting returns to full main beam about a display.
ity27 then the lighting returns to main beam about second after the camera sensor no longer When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light
142 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
beam shines with slightly more than dipped or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, IMPORTANT
beam. the message goes out and the symbol illu-
Examples of when manual switching between
minates.
Manual operation main and dipped beam may be required:
143
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Active bending lights* The function is only active in weak daylight or Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide darkness and only when the car is moving and The front fog lamps have cornering lights that
maximum illumination in bends and junctions. dipped beam is switched on. shine diagonally to the side.
Cars with LED28 headlamps* can have active Deactivating/activating the function
bending lights, depending on the car's equip- The function is in activated mode when the car is
ment level. delivered from the factory and can be deacti-
vated/activated via the centre display in two
ways:
Via the function view
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
144 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE Rear fog lamp Press the on/off button. The symbol in the
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
the normal rear lights and should only be used in is switched on.
from country to country.
reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
dust so that other road users have an early warn- when:
Cornering lights ing of a vehicle ahead.
The front fog lamps include the cornering lights • the start knob is turned clockwise to switch
function, which temporarily illuminates the area off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is
diagonally in front of the car in the direction the set to the position
steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in
the direction shown by the direction indicators.
• the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
The function is activated in weak daylight or dark- off.
ness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
the or position and the speed of the NOTE
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx.
20 mph). Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing. Button for rear fog lamp. Related information
The rear fog lamp consists of a lamp on the left-
• Lighting control (p. 137)
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be deactivated/acti- hand side on a left-hand drive car, or on the right- • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 144)
vated via the centre display. hand side on a right-hand drive car. • Ignition positions (p. 411)
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
Related information
• Lighting control (p. 137) • ignition position II is active or the car is run-
ning and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
• Rear fog lamp (p. 145)
position or
• Active bending lights* (p. 144)
• the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
• Ignition positions (p. 411)
and the front fog lamps are switched
on.
* Option/accessory. 145
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
• Emergency brake lights (p. 434)
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
• City Safety (p. 344)
• Rear Collision Warning (p. 356)
146 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
Direction indicators.
• Lighting control (p. 137)
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 146)
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
• Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated via the centre display.
* Option/accessory. 147
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Auto function for passenger compartment • remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side
lighting doors is open.
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Rear lighting
Front reading lamps The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand which is also used as passenger compartment
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing lighting.
the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is The reading lamps are located in the interior roof.
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the but-
ton in the roof console. Reading lamp above the rear seat in cars with panorama
roof*.
Auto function for passenger compartment
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
lighting
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright-
The automatic function is activated by a short
ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
The light indicator in the button illuminates when Glovebox lighting
the automatic function is activated. Press the Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec-
AUTO button to switch the passenger compart- tively when the lid is opened or closed.
ment lighting on and off in accordance with the Reading lamps above the rear seat29.
following. Vanity mirror lighting*
The lighting for the vanity mirror in the sun visor
Passenger compartment lighting:
is switched on and off respectively when the
• illuminates when the car is unlocked and cover is opened or closed.
when it is switched off
Ground lighting*
• extinguishes when the car is started and
when it is locked The ground lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
• comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed
29 In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.
148 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Ambient light
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Controls located next to the steering wheel.
Interior Lighting. The intensity of the ambient light can be adjusted
3. Choose between the following settings: using the control in the instrument panel:
• Under Ambient Light Intensity, select – Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.
from Off, Low and High.
Ambience lights*
• Under Ambient Light Level, select from The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
Reduced and Full. make it possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is run-
ning.
The ambience lights can be changed via the cen-
tre display:
Changing the brightness of the lights
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
}}
* Option/accessory. 149
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Changing the colour of the light The intensity of the ambience light can be Home safe light duration
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre adjusted using the controls in the instrument Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
display. panel: switched on to work as home safe lighting after
2. – Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity. the car has been locked.
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. Lighting in storage compartments in To activate the function:
3. Choose between By Temperature and By doors 1. Switch off the car.
Colour in order to change the brightness The lighting in storage compartments in doors is
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
and colour of the light. switched on when the car is running. The bright-
toward the instrument panel and release.
ness can be finely adjusted using the control in
With the By Temperature option, the the instrument panel. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
brightness of the light changes according to
the set passenger compartment temperature. Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel When the function is activated, dipped beam,
position lamps, lighting in the outside handles*
With the By Colour option, the Theme console
and number plate lighting are switched on.
Colours subcategory can be used to adjust The lighting in the front cup holders is switched
further. on when the car is unlocked and is switched off The length of time that home safe lighting
when the car is locked. The brightness can be remains on can be set via the centre display.
finely adjusted using the control in the instrument
panel. Related information
• Approach light duration (p. 151)
Related information • Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
• Lighting control (p. 137)
• Ignition positions (p. 411)
• Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
150 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 151
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating the rain switch must be in position 0 or in the position for Activating/deactivating the memory
sensor a single sweep. function
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen- The memory function for the rain sensor can be
screen wipers based on how much water it activated in such a way that the rain sensor but-
sor button .
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv- ton does not need to be depressed each time the
ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to car is started:
right-hand stalk switch. make an extra sweep.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- display.
ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
2. Press My Car Wipers.
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward. 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain Related information
sensor button or moving the stalk switch • Using windscreen wipers (p. 151)
up to another wiper program.
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 554)
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in • Rear window wiper and washer (p. 153)
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
Right-hand stalk switch. The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when
Rain sensor button wiper blades are set in service position. The rain
sensor is reactivated when service position has
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency been deactivated.
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
symbol is shown in the driver display. IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
Activating the rain sensor damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti-
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be vate the rain sensor while the car is running
running or the electrical system in ignition posi- or when the car's electrical system is in igni-
tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver
display extinguishes.
152
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Windscreen and headlamp washers Heated washer nozzles* Rear window wiper and washer
Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the The washer nozzles are heated automatically in Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear
windscreen and headlamps. Washing/wiping is cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from window. Washing/wiping is started and settings
started by means of the right-hand stalk switch. freezing. are changed by means of the right-hand steering
wheel stalk switch.
Starting windscreen and headlamp Headlamp washing*
washers To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto- NOTE
matically at a defined interval when the head-
lamps are switched on. The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
heating protection which means that the
Reduced washing motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in window wiper works again after a cooling-
the reservoir and the message Washer fluid down period.
Level low, refill, together with the symbol,
is shown in the driver display, then the supply of Using the rear window wiper and
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. washer
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind-
screen and the visibility through it.
Related information
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
• Using windscreen wipers (p. 151)
– Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the
• Rear window wiper and washer (p. 153)
steering wheel to start the windscreen and
headlamp washers. • Filling washer fluid (p. 556)
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has
been released.
IMPORTANT
Select for intermittent wiping with the
Avoid activating the washer system when it is rear window wiper.
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other-
wise there is a risk of damaging the pump. Select for continuous speed with the
}}
rear window wiper.
* Option/accessory. 153
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| – Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk Power windows Operating power windows
switch forward to start rear window washing Using the driver's door control panel, all power Using the driver's door control panel, all power
and wiping. windows can be operated - using the control windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power panels in the other doors operates the power
Activating/deactivating wiping when
window in the individual door. window in the individual door.
reversing
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
WARNING
display.
Check that no children or other passengers
2. Press My Car Wipers. are trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti-
vate wiping when reversing.
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip- WARNING
ers are on initiates rear window wiping. The func- Check that no children or other passengers
tion stops when reverse gear is disengaged. are trapped if/when the windows are closed
using the remote control key.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
ous speed, no change is made.
Driver's door control panel. WARNING
Related information
Electric child safety locks* that prevent chil- If there are children in the car - remember to
• Using windscreen wipers (p. 151) always switch off the power supply to the
dren from being able to open the rear doors
• Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 153)
from inside and open/close the rear win-
power windows by setting the car's electrical
system in ignition position 0 and then take
• Activating/deactivating the rain sensor dows. the remote control key with you when leaving
(p. 152) the car.
Controls for rear windows.
• Filling washer fluid (p. 556)
Controls for front windows.
WARNING
Related information Never leave children alone in the car.
• Operating power windows (p. 154)
• Child safety locks (p. 264)
154 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 155
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
• Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 243) Using the sun blind* Adjusting the door mirrors
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 247) Sun blinds can be installed, built into each rear The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
door. joystick in the driver's door control panel.
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear further away than
they actually are.
156 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Memory function in power front seat* Automatic angling of the door mirror Resetting to neutral
Door mirror positions can be saved in the mem- when parking30 Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
ory function of the power front seat. When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is an external force must be reset electrically to the
automatically angled down so that the driver can neutral position for electric retracting/extending
Retractable power door mirrors* see the side of the road when parking for exam- to work correctly:
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
in narrow spaces: 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
automatically returns to its original position after
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously a short time. 2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
(ignition position must be at least I). tons.
Settings for this function are set via the centre
2. Release them after approximately 1 second. display: 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully 1. Press Settings in the top view. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
retracted position.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry. Automatic dimming*
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, by the interior rearview and door mirrors.
cally stop in the fully extended position. select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function
Angling the door mirror when parking30 review mirror should be angled. requires that the interior rearview mirror also has
The door mirror can be angled down for the automatic dimming, see the section "Interior rear-
driver to view the side of the road when parking Automatic retraction when locking* view mirror".
for example. When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
control key the door mirrors are automatically
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R apart from when gearbox reverse position is
retracted/extended.
button. selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
The function can be activated/deactivated via the three levels and will affect the interior rearview
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
centre display: and the door mirrors.
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the 1. Press Settings in the top view.
button labelled L or R respectively.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.
* Option/accessory. 157
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
158 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Settings for this function are set via the centre Compass* Related information
display: The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- • Calibrating the compass* (p. 160)
1. Press Settings in the top view. ror has an integrated display that shows the • Ignition positions (p. 411)
compass direction in which the front of the car is
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry. pointing.
• Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 196)
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Related information
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 156)
• Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
* Option/accessory. 159
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
160 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 161
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING IMPORTANT
Children, other passengers or objects may be • Remove ice and snow before opening the
trapped by the panoramic roof's moving parts. panoramic roof.
• Always operate the panoramic roof with • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
caution. has frozen closed.
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
• Do not allow children to play with the
controls. In order that the panoramic roof and sun blind Open by pressing the control upward.
• Never leave children alone in the car. can be operated, the car's electrical system must Close by pressing the control forward/down-
be in at least ignition position I. Turn the start
• Remember to always switch off the power
knob clockwise and then release it. The panor-
ward.
supply to the panoramic roof by setting When the ventilation position is selected the front
amic roof and sun blind are operated using the
the car's electrical system in ignition posi- glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
control in the ceiling.
tion 0, and then take the remote control blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
key with you when leaving the car. selected, then it opens automatically approx.
• Never put an object or part of the body 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
through the panoramic roof, even if the The sun blind follows automatically if the panor-
car's electrical system is fully discon- amic roof is closed from ventilation position.
nected.
162 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Operating with the control in the roof 2. Open the panorama roof - press the control 2. To open the panorama roof, press the control
backwards a second time to the position for backwards a second time to the position for
manual opening. The panoramic roof first automatic opening and release. The panor-
reaches comfort position31. In order to open amic roof first reaches comfort position31. To
to maximum opening position - press the open to the maximum opening position -
control backwards a third time. press the control a third time backward to
the position for automatic opening and
Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
release.
procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the manual closing position Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
instead. procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the automatic closing posi-
The movement of the roof is stopped if the con-
tion instead.
trol is released or when the glass reaches the
comfort position or the maximum opening or The movement of the roof is stopped when the
Opening, manual closing position. The movement is also stopped if glass reaches the comfort position or the maxi-
Opening, automatic the control is operated again in the opposite mum opening or closing position. The movement
direction to the direction of movement in pro- is also stopped if the control is operated again in
Closing, manual gress. the opposite direction to the direction of move-
ment in progress.
Closing, automatic
NOTE The movement of the roof is not stopped when
Manual operation For manual opening, the sun blind must be the glass reaches the comfort position when
1. To open the sun blind - press the control fully open before the panoramic roof can be closing from maximum opening position.
backwards to the position for manual open- opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
ing. The sun blind moves towards maximum panoramic roof must be fully closed before
opening position for as long as the control is the sun blind can be fully closed.
held depressed rearward.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
31 Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving. }}
163
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Automatic operation - rapid opening/closing 2. Press My Car Locking. the driver's door or passenger door* can be used
The panorama roof and sun blind can be to close the panoramic roof.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
opened/closed simultaneously:
activate/deactivate. – Give a long press on the central locking but-
– To open - press the control rearward to the ton until the panorama roof and sun blind
automatic operation position twice and Closing using the remote control key, start moving towards the closed position.
release. central locking button or door handles Then release the button.
– To close - press the control forward/down- Remote control key Movement stops if the central locking button is
ward to the automatic operation position – Give a long press on the remote control key's pressed again or when the roof/blind has
twice and release. lock button until the panorama roof and reached the closed position.
The movement of the roof is stopped when the sun blind start moving towards the closed Door handle
glass reaches the comfort position or the closing position. Then release the lock button.
Cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*
position. When closing from maximum opening Movement stops if the remote control key's lock have a touch-sensitive recess on the outer part of
position, the movement is not stopped at comfort button is pressed again or when the roof/blind the outside door handle.
position. The movement of the blind is not stop- has reached the closed position.
ped when the roof reaches comfort position. The – Place your finger against the touch-sensitive
Central locking button recess on the outside of one of the door
movement is also stopped if the control is oper-
handles until the panorama roof and sun
ated again in the opposite direction to the direc-
blind start moving towards the closed posi-
tion of movement in progress.
tion. Then remove your finger from door han-
Automatic closing of the sun blind dle's recess.
When the car is parked in hot weather, the sun Movement stops if you place your finger against
blind closes automatically 15 minutes after the the door handle recess again or once the roof/
car has been locked. This is in order to lower the blind has reached the closed position.
passenger compartment temperature and protect
the car upholstery from being bleached by the
WARNING
sun.
If the panorama roof is closed with the remote
The function is deactivated when the car is sup- control key, the central locking button or door
plied from the factory and can be activated/deac- handle, check that no one risks being trapped.
Central locking button.
tivated:
When the car's electrical system is set in at least
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
ignition position I, the central locking button in
display.
164 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
General
Pinch protection
The panorama roof has pinch protection that is
triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is
blocked by an object during closing. In the event
of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind stops
and is then opened automatically to approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked posi-
tion (or to full ventilation position). The pinch pro-
tection is also active when the glass cover or sun
blind is opened.
If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still
possible to operate the glass cover and/or sun
blind once more in the same direction without Button 1
pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds
after pinch protection deployment. It is therefore Button 2
possible to override the pinch protection when
Button 3
closing has been interrupted e.g. if ice has
formed around the glass cover, by continually Indicator lamp
pressing the control forward/downward until the
glass cover and/or sun blind is closed. HomeLink®33 is a programmable remote control
that can remotely control up to three different
Related information devices (e.g., garage door openers, alarm sys-
• Panorama roof* (p. 161) tems, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thus
• Ignition positions (p. 411) replace their remote controls. HomeLink® is sup-
plied built into the interior rearview mirror. The
• Remote control key (p. 238)
HomeLink® panel consists of three programma-
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 247)
}}
* Option/accessory. 165
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| ble buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror deleted when the car is sold; see the section Programming HomeLink®*34
glass. "Programming HomeLink®". Instructions for programming HomeLink®.
For more information about HomeLink®, visit Related information
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ Programming HomeLink®
• Programming HomeLink®* (p. 166)
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number NOTE
+49 6838 907 277).
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position" before
WARNING HomeLink® can be programmed or used.
• If HomeLink® is used to control a garage Preferably fit new batteries in the remote con-
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near trol that will be replaced by HomeLink® for
the door or gate while it is in motion. faster programming and improved transmis-
• While programming HomeLink, the sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink® but-
garage door or gate being programmed tons should be reset before programming,
may activate. For this reason, make sure see the heading "Resetting the HomeLink®
that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or buttons". When the reset is complete,
gate while programming is in progress. HomeLink® is set in "learn mode" and ready
for programming.
• The car should be outside the garage
while a garage door opener is being pro-
grammed. 1. Press the button35 on HomeLink® you want
• Do not use HomeLink® for any garage to program. The indicator lamp35 on
door that does not have safety stop and HomeLink® should flash yellow once per
safety reverse. second. It is not necessary to hold the button
depressed.
Save the original remote controls for future pro-
gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or
for use in another vehicle). It is also recom-
mended that the programming for the buttons is
166 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2. Aim the remote control towards the 4. Press and release the button on the original
HomeLink® button to be programmed and remote control every other second until the
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) indicator lamp has changed from flashing
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator yellow once per second to either flashing
lamp on HomeLink®. green 10 times per second or illuminating in
a constant green glow.
Note: The ability of some remote controls to
program HomeLink® is improved at a dis- 5. Depress the programmed HomeLink® button
tance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12 and check the indicator lamp.
inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter > Constant green glow: If the indicator
problems during programming. lamp illuminates in a constant green glow, 6. Locate programming button36 on the
programming is complete. The garage receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
3. Press and hold the button on the original
door, gate or similar should now be acti- normally located near the antenna bracket on
remote control to be programmed on
vated when the programmed button is the receiver.
HomeLink® and keep an eye on the indicator
depressed.
lamp. Do not release the button until the 7. Depress and release the receiver's program-
indicator lamp has switched from flashing Flashes green 10 times per second: ming button. Step 8 must be completed
yellow once per second to either flashing Depress the button being programmed, within 30 seconds of the button being
green 10 times per second or illuminating in hold it depressed for 2 seconds and depressed.
a constant green glow. The button on the then release it. Repeat the sequence of
8. Depress the button being programmed, hold
remote control can be released once the pressing/holding/releasing a second time
it depressed for 2 seconds and then
indicator lamp flashes or illuminates in green. and, depending on the receiver model,
release it. Repeat the sequence of press-
even a third time. Programming should
Note: For some receivers, programming step ing/holding/releasing a second time and,
now be complete and the garage door,
3 may need to be replaced with the instruc- depending on the receiver model, even a
gate or similar should now be activated
tions in step 4. third time. Programming is now be com-
when the programmed button is
plete and the garage door, gate or similar
depressed.
should now be activated when the pro-
If the receiver is still not activated: grammed button is depressed.
Continue with programming steps 6-8 to
complete programming.
167
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
168 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 169
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| If the analogue speedometer is graduated in Show trip data in the driver display 1. Open the app menu in the driver display by
mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres- The trip computer's recorded and calculated val- pressing (1).
ponding speed in km/h and vice versa. ues can be shown in the driver display. (It is not possible to open the app menu
Related information while there is an unacknowledged message
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via
in the driver display. The message must be
• Show trip data in the driver display (p. 170) the app menu, you can choose which information
confirmed before the app menu can be
• Show trip statistics in the centre display is shown on the driver display.
opened.)
(p. 171)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3).
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select
which information to show in the driver dis-
play:
• Distance to empty tank
Open and navigate in the app menu37 using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad. • Odometer
App menu • Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis-
play of mileage
Left/right
• Instantaneous fuel consumption, average
Up/down consumption for TM or TA, alternatively,
no display of fuel consumption
Confirm
• Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Select or deselect an option with the O but-
ton (4). The change is made immediately.
170
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Resetting the trip meter 2. Press System System Languages and Show trip statistics in the centre
Units Units of Measurement. display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis-
3. Select the required unit standard: Metric,
played graphically in the centre display and pro-
Imperial or US. vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi-
cient driving.
NOTE
Open the Driver performance
In addition to in the trip computer, these units
app in app view in order to
are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys-
show the trip statistics.
tem*.
Each bar in the diagram sym-
bolises a distance of 1, 10 or
Related information 100 km, alternatively miles. The
• Trip computer (p. 168) bars are filled in from the right as driving pro-
– Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average • Show trip statistics in the centre display gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
(p. 171) for the current distance.
speed and driving time) with a long press on
the RESET button on the left-hand stalk • Using the application menu in the driver dis- The average fuel consumption and total driving
switch. play (p. 111) time are calculated since the last time the trip
A short press on the RESET button resets statistics were reset.
only the mileage.
Trip meter TA only has automatic resetting. The
meter is reset if the car is not used for four hours
or more.
Change unit
Change the units for mileage, speed, etc. via the
centre display as follows:
1. Press Settings in the top view.
}}
* Option/accessory. 171
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
38 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on selected unit standard or updated software.
172
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
173
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
174 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory. 175
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| 2. Continue to System System Resetting settings in the settings 4. Press OK to confirm the reset.
Information Vehicle Identification menu For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
Number. It is possible to reset all modified settings in the must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
> The car's vehicle identification number centre display settings menu to their default val- the active profile or Reset for all profiles.
ues at once.
(VIN39) is shown. > Selected settings are reset.
176
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Driver profiles They remain the same regardless of which driver Selecting driver profile
Many of the settings made in the car can be profile is active. The last used driver profile is the one selected
adapted according to the driver's personal pref- Keyboard layout settings are an example of when the car is unlocked. It is possible to
erences and can be saved in one or more driver global settings. If driver profile X is used to add change to another driver profile after the car has
profiles. additional languages to the keyboard, these been unlocked.
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is
The personal settings are automatically saved in When the centre display has been started, the
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved
the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to selected driver profile is shown at the top of the
to a specific driver profile - the settings are
a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the screen. The driver profile last used is the one that
global.
car is adapted to the settings of that specific will be active next time the car is unlocked. How-
driver profile. Personal preferences ever, if the remote control key has been linked to
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis- a driver profile then this is what is selected when
What settings are saved in the driver play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by the car is started. See "Linking remote control
profiles? this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X - key to driver profile".
Many of the settings made in the car will be auto- the brightness setting is a personal setting.
There are two options for changing to another
matically saved in the active driver profile if the
Refer to the section "Categories in the settings driver profile.
profile is not locked; see the section "Editing a
menu" for more information on which settings
driver profile". Settings made in the car are either Option 1:
are personal and which are global.
personal or global. Only personal settings are
1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
saved in driver profiles. Related information in the top of the centre display when the dis-
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile • Editing a driver profile (p. 178) play has been started.
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, • Categories in the settings menu (p. 174) > A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
front seats, navigation, audio and media system,
language and voice control.
• Selecting driver profile (p. 177) 2. Select the driver profile required.
}}
177
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| 2. Press Profile. Editing a driver profile 3. Save the name change by tapping on Back/
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown. It is possible to change the name of the different Close.
driver profiles used in the car. > The name has now been changed.
3. Select the driver profile required.
4. Press Confirm. NOTE
> The driver profile is selected and the sys- A profile name cannot start with a space, as
tem loads the settings for the new driver the profile name will not then be saved.
profile.
178
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
• Using the keyboard in the centre display Linking remote control key to driver 4. Drag down the top view again and tap on
(p. 49) profile Settings System Driver Profiles
• Selecting driver profile (p. 177) It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. Edit Profile.
The driver profile along with all of its settings will 5. Select Connect key to link the profile with
then be automatically selected every time the car the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro-
is used with that specific remote control key. file to a different key than the one currently
The first time the remote control key is used, it is being used in the car. If there are multiple
not linked to any specific driver profile. When the keys in the car, the message More than one
car is started, the Guest profile will automatically key is found, put the key you want to
be activated. connect on backup reader will be dis-
played.
A driver profile can be selected manually without
linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
profile does not need to be selected when that
specific key is used.
2. 6. Press OK.
Press System Driver Profiles.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile
3. Select the desired profile. The display returns and will remain linked as long as the
to the home view. The Guest profile cannot Connect key box is not unticked.
be linked to a key.
}}
179
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Related information Changing settings for apps are always made inside the app and not from the
• Driver profiles (p. 177) All of the car's apps are listed in the app view. top view.
• Editing a driver profile (p. 178) The app settings that relate to the car's embed-
Related information
ded functions can be changed from the centre
• Remote control key (p. 238)
display's top view. • Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
Apps for embedded functions - basic • Settings in the centre display (p. 172)
apps • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
The apps installed in the car from the beginning, (p. 495)
e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and
are part of the car's embedded functions. Set- • Categories in the settings menu (p. 174)
tings for these apps can be changed directly in
the top view in the centre display.
Change the settings for a basic app
1. Tap on the app, e.g. FM radio.
2. Drag down the top view.
3. Press FM Radio Settings.
4. Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
5. Press either the physical home button or the
virtual close button.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
setting option, but not all. Refer to the section
"Categories in the settings menu" for more infor-
mation on how settings are changed.
180
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
• Resetting settings in the settings menu
(p. 176)
• Volvo ID (p. 23)
* Option/accessory. 181
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
2-zone climate
184 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate control - sensors With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also Perceived temperature
The climate control system has a number of sen- an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate The climate control system regulates the climate
sors to help control the climate in the car. control system air intake. in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual tempera-
Sensor location Related information ture.
• Climate control (p. 184)
• Perceived temperature (p. 185) The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically per-
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 187)
ceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passen-
ger compartment. This means that the tempera-
ture can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte- the same temperature on both sides.
rior rearview mirror.
Related information
Outside temperature sensor - in the right- • Climate control (p. 184)
hand door mirror.
• Climate control - sensors (p. 185)
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru-
ment panel. • Regulating the temperature (p. 193)
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
* Option/accessory. 185
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air cleaning system • That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
In addition to the passenger compartment filter, • That all side windows and the panorama
Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air roof* are closed.
Quality System* also help to maintain high air • That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
quality in the passenger compartment. System* is activated.
Clean Zone* • That the ventilation fan is activated.
The Clean Zone function checks whether or not • That the air recirculation is deactivated.
all conditions have been met for good air quality
in the passenger compartment.
186 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Passenger compartment filter Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System*
All air entering the car's passenger compartment Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto-
is cleaned with a filter. a series of modifications that keep the passen- matic air quality system that separates gases
ger compartment even clearer from allergy and and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
Replacing the passenger compartment asthma-inducing substances. contaminants in the passenger compartment.
filter
To maintain high climate system performance, The following is included: IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen-
• An enhanced fan function that means that
ger compartment from contaminants such as par-
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- the fan starts when the car is unlocked with
ommended replacement intervals. If the car is ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-
the remote control key. The fan fills the pas-
used in a severely contaminated environment, it level ozone.
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
may be necessary to replace the filter more often. tion starts when required and is disengaged If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
automatically after a time or when one of the air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
NOTE passenger compartment doors is opened. air recirculation is activated.
There are different types of passenger com- The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- gradually due to reduced need up until the NOTE
ter is fitted. car is 4 years old.
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
• The fully automatic air quality system Interior to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
Air Quality System (IAQS). partment.
Related information
• Air quality (p. 186) Related information In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 187) • Air quality (p. 186) to prevent misting.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 187) • Passenger compartment filter (p. 187) In the event of misting, the defrost functions
• Volvo service programme (p. 534) • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 187) for windscreen, side windows and rear win-
dow should be used.
}}
* Option/accessory. 187
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Climate controls • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
display. The climate control system's functions are con- and door mirrors (p. 196)
2. Press Climate. trolled from the centre display, physical buttons
in the centre console and the climate panel at
3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac- the rear of the tunnel console*.
tivate the air quality sensor.
Overview of climate controls
Related information
• Air quality (p. 186)
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 187)
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 187)
• Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 199)
Related information
• Climate control (p. 184)
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 189)
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 190)
188 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
* Option/accessory. 189
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Rear climate control* Parking climate* Climate controls at the rear of the
All climate functions for the rear seat can be The car's parking climate control can be regula- tunnel console*
regulated in the Rear climate tab. ted in the Parking climate tab. The rear seat's climate functions are controlled
from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel
Related information console.
• Climate controls (p. 188)
• Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 196)
• Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 192)
• Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 199)
• Changing the air distribution (p. 200)
• Regulating the fan level (p. 195)
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 191)
• Regulating the temperature (p. 193)
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* Controls for heated rear seat*.
(p. 205)
Fan controls for rear seat.
• Activating/deactivating ventilation of the
seats* (p. 206) Temperature controls for rear seat.
• Activating/deactivating heating of steering
Locking/unlocking button on the climate
wheel* (p. 207)
2nd row climate - Controls for climate func- panel.
tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear
• Parking climate* (p. 208)
If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at
seat. the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated
Temperature controls for rear seat. rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear
of the tunnel console for controlling these.
Controls for heated rear seat*. The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent
unintentional change of fan speed and tempera-
190 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
ture. When the screen is locked, only the seat Auto-regulating the climate 2. Give a short or long press on AUTO.
controls* and the unlocking button are shown. With auto climate control activated, multiple cli- • Short press - air recirculation, air condi-
After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature mate functions are controlled automatically. tioning and air distribution are controlled
can be changed via the climate panel and all automatically.
selected climate settings are shown. The screen • Long press - air recirculation, air condi-
locks automatically after a period of inactivity. tioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically, temperature and fan level
Related information
are changed to standard settings: 22
• Climate controls (p. 188)
°C/72 °F and level 3 (level 2 in the rear
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* seat1).
(p. 205)
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated
• Regulating the fan level (p. 195) and the button illuminates.
• Regulating the temperature (p. 193)
NOTE
Auto-regulation button in the climate view. Temperature and fan speed can be changed
without deactivating the automatically-regula-
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. ted climate control system. The automatically-
regulated climate control system is deacti-
vated when the air distribution is changed
manually or when maximum defroster is acti-
vated.
Related information
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 189)
• Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 192)
* Option/accessory. 191
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 189)
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 191)
192 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
controls.
following:
1. Press the driver's side temperature button in
• drag the control to the desired tempera-
the centre display's climate row in order to
ture, or
open the controls.
• press +/− to raise/lower the temperature
Temperature buttons in the climate row. gradually. 2. Press Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature changes and the button > The temperature for all zones in the car is
1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
shows the set temperature. synchronised with the temperature set for
button in the centre display's climate row to
the driver's side and the synchronisation
open the controls.
symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera-
ture button.
Synchronisation is stopped by a further press on
Synchronise temperature or by changing the
passenger side or rear seat* temperature set-
tings.
* Option/accessory. 193
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information
• Climate controls (p. 188)
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 189)
194 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel Regulating the fan level Regulating fan level for rear seat*
console* (p. 190) The fan can be set to five different automatic fan From the front seat
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 191) levels as well as Off and Max. With 4-zone cli-
mate* the fan level can be set separately for the
• Perceived temperature (p. 185)
front and rear seats.
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air con-
ditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
* Option/accessory. 195
CLIMATE CONTROL
NOTE
The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if
the fan level for the front seat is in position
Off.
The rear seat fan speed can only be switched Physical buttons in the centre console.
off from the climate view in the centre display. Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mir-
rors.
196 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Cars without heated windscreen: From the climate view in the centre NOTE
– Press the button (1). display
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated Activating/deactivating max defroster noise level.
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
– Press the button (1) repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
• Activated heated windscreen
• Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
• Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes. Max defroster button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
NOTE
2. Press Max.
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in > Max defroster is activated/deactivated
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button. Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, acti-
vates air conditioning and changes the
Rear window and door mirror defrosters:
fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.
– Press the button (2).
When max defroster is deactivated, the
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are climate control system returns to the pre-
activated/deactivated and the button illu- vious settings.
minates/extinguishes.
}}
197
CLIMATE CONTROL
198 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory. 199
CLIMATE CONTROL
Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
rear of the tunnel console.
Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
Related information and centre console
• Climate control (p. 184) Air distribution - air vents in the floor
• Changing the air distribution (p. 200)
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
• Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
2. Press one or more of the air distribution but-
(p. 201)
tons in order to open/close the correspond-
• Table of air distribution options (p. 203) ing air flow.
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 191) > The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
200 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Opening/closing and aiming the air Opening/closing the air vents Air vents for the rear seat:
vents Air vents for the front seat:
Some air vents in the passenger compartment
can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
201
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information
• Air distribution (p. 199)
• Changing the air distribution (p. 200)
• Table of air distribution options (p. 203)
202
CLIMATE CONTROL
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
other air vents.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
vents.
}}
203
CLIMATE CONTROL
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
flows from other air vents. humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
floor. Some air flows from other air vents. temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
panel and air vents at the floor.
Related information • Opening/closing and aiming the air vents • Climate controls in the centre display
• Air distribution (p. 199) (p. 201) (p. 189)
• Changing the air distribution (p. 200)
204
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating/deactivating heating of 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats From the rear seat
the seats* in order to change between the four levels: With 2-zone climate:
The seats can be heated in order to increase Off, High, Medium and Low.
comfort for driver and passengers when it is > The level changes and the button shows
cold. the set level.
}}
* Option/accessory. 205
CLIMATE CONTROL
206 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel
}}
* Option/accessory. 207
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated Parking climate* Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
steering wheel in order to change between The climate of the car's passenger compartment the timer.
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. can be preconditioned or maintained while the The function utilises several systems in different
> The level changes and the button shows car is parked. cases:
the set level.
• The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
Activating/deactivating automatic start up both the passenger compartment and the
of heated steering wheel engine.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of • When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
heated steering wheel should be activated/deac- passenger compartment by blowing in air
tivated when the engine is started. With auto- from outside the car.
matic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature. NOTE
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre During preconditioning of the passenger
display. compartment, the car works to reach comfort
2. Press Climate. temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
3. Under Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level, select Off,Low,Medium or High in
order to activate/deactivate the automatic Climate comfort retention
starting of steering wheel heating and to The climate in the car's passenger compartment
select the level. can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if
the engine needs to be switched off but the
Related information driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car
• Climate controls (p. 188) and maintain the level of climate comfort.
• Climate controls in the centre display Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con- Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
(p. 189) trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis- via direct start.
• Steering wheel (p. 135) play's climate view.
Preconditioning
Preconditioning of the car before driving can
reduce wear and energy needs during a journey.
208 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory. 209
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| senger compartment by blowing in air from out- Timer for preconditioning* Setting the timer for
side. The timer can be set so that the preconditioning preconditioning*
The passenger compartment can also be precon- is finished at a predetermined time. The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
ditioned with the car remote start function 8 time settings.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)5 via the Volvo On
for: Adding a time setting
Call* app.
• A time on a single date
Related information
• A time on one or more days of the week, with
• Parking climate* (p. 208) or without repetition.
• Timer for preconditioning* (p. 210)
Related information
• Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
• Parking climate* (p. 208)
tion* (p. 212)
• Setting the timer for preconditioning*
• Symbols and messages for parking climate
(p. 210)
control* (p. 214)
• Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
• Heater* (p. 215)
ditioning* (p. 212)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 209)
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
• Symbols and messages for parking climate tab in the climate view.
control* (p. 214)
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
5 Certain markets.
210 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
4.
• When there is a risk that the heater’s
Tap on Date to set the time for a single date. exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
days of the week. wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation. The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
ticking/unticking the box for Repeat Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
weekly. time in advance. 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
5. With Date: Select the date for precondition-
ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows. 3. Press Edit list.
Editing a time setting
With Days: Select the days of the week for 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for 2. Select the Parking climate tab. > The icon changes to the text Delete.
the days of the week. 5. Press Delete to confirm.
3. Press the time setting that is to be changed.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning > The time setting is removed from the list.
> A pop-up window is shown.
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows. 4. Edit the time setting in the same way as Related information
7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time set-
described in "Adding a time setting" above. • Timer for preconditioning* (p. 210)
ting. • Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
> The time setting is added to the list and is ditioning* (p. 212)
activated. • Heater* (p. 215)
* Option/accessory. 211
CLIMATE CONTROL
212 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual heat
in the engine to maintain the passenger com-
partment climate, or if the outside tempera-
ture is above approx. 20 °C.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
• Parking climate* (p. 208)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 209)
* Option/accessory. 213
CLIMATE CONTROL
Symbols and messages for parking This symbol illuminates in the driver
climate control* display when the parking heater is
A number of symbols and messages regarding active.
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.
Parking climate Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work-
Temporarily unavailable shopA to check the function.
Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill-
ing the vehicle's normal fuel tank.
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Charging the battery.
Unavailable Charge level too low
Related information • Starting/switching off climate comfort reten- • Managing messages in the driver display and
• Parking climate* (p. 208) tion* (p. 212) the centre display (p. 113)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 209) • Timer for preconditioning* (p. 210)
• Heater* (p. 215)
214 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
When the heater is running, smoke may be Warning label on fuel filler flap. • Additional heater* (p. 217)
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel • Parking climate* (p. 208)
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking tank.
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
fectly normal.
supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
Battery and charging
heater is switched off automatically and the driver
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery.
display shows a message.
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low,
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.
* Option/accessory. 215
CLIMATE CONTROL
216 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs
to be used.
* Option/accessory. 217
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
Front seat
220 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 220)
• Electrical sockets (p. 222)
• Connecting a device via USB port (p. 474)
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 190)
* Option/accessory. 221
LOADING AND STORAGE
Electrical sockets Electrical socket in the tunnel console - 3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the
In the tunnel console there are two 12 V electri- rear seat* plug - do not pull on the cable.
cal sockets and one 230 V electrical socket*, in Pull up the cover when the socket is not
the cargo area there is one 12 V electrical being used or the socket is left unattended.
socket*.
222 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
223
LOADING AND STORAGE
WARNING
Never modify or repair the 230 V electrical
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contac-
ted.
224
LOADING AND STORAGE
Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 220)
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per
socket.
* Option/accessory. 225
LOADING AND STORAGE
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise. • Using private locking (p. 252)
226 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use total of the weight of the passengers and all
load retaining eyelets or bag holders to secure accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor-
the load, and the extendable cargo cover* to con- responding weight.
ceal the load if desired.
WARNING
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area The car’s driving properties change depend-
ing on the weight and positioning of the load.
floor.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
}}
* Option/accessory. 227
LOADING AND STORAGE
|| WARNING Roof load and loading on load carriers • Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers3 (p. 133)
The protection provided by the inflatable cur-
tain in the headlining may be compromised or that Volvo have developed are recommended. • Safety grille* (p. 234)
eliminated by high loads. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
• Safety net* (p. 233)
• Never load cargo above the backrest. during a journey. • Cargo cover* (p. 231)
Carefully follow the installation instructions sup- • Weights (p. 589)
WARNING plied with the carriers.
Always secure the load. During heavy braking • Check periodically that the load carriers and
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to load are properly secured. Lash the load
the car's occupants. securely with retaining straps.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
• Distribute the load evenly over the load carri-
ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items. • The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a size of the load.
drive position - and the car could then move • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
off. braking and hard cornering.
3 Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
228 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Load retaining eyelets Bag hooks There are two bag hooks and an elastic strap4 in
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to Bag hooks, together with an elastic strap, hold the cover, which is part of the floor hatch in the
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the bags in place and prevent them from falling over cargo area. The strap can be fitted in four differ-
cargo area. and spreading their contents across the cargo ent positions.
area. Lift up the cover in order to use the bag hooks.
Fasten the bags in a suitable position with the
Under the floor hatch*
enclosed elastic strap. If the bags have handles
and are a suitable height - hang them in the
hooks.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro-
trude may cause injury under violent braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
There are two bag hooks in the side panel on
Related information each side of the cargo area.
• Recommendations for loading (p. 227)
IMPORTANT
• Bag hooks (p. 229)
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi-
• Safety grille* (p. 234)
mum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
• Safety net* (p. 233)
• Cargo cover* (p. 231)
}}
* Option/accessory. 229
LOADING AND STORAGE
|| Related information Through-load hatch in the rear seat • Load retaining eyelets (p. 229)
• Recommendations for loading (p. 227) The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
• Safety grille* (p. 234) opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.
• Safety net* (p. 233)
• Cargo cover* (p. 231)
Related information
• Using private locking (p. 252)
• Recommendations for loading (p. 227)
230 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Installation
}}
* Option/accessory. 231
LOADING AND STORAGE
|| Loading mode tion every time the tailgate is opened, and Retracting
From the full-cover position: extended again when the tailgate is closed. The 1. From the full-cover position:
cargo cover detects if something is obstructing
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
its movement and then retracts automatically.
engage the cargo cover's attachment pins
NOTE and then release.
The cargo cover may not operate automati- From loading position:
cally in low passenger compartment tempera- Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
tures. in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position.
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the attachment pins and then
IMPORTANT release.
Grasp the handle and pull it back until it Do not load objects on top of the cargo cover.
2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins
stops.
outside of the side panels until it stops in the
Angle the cover down. IMPORTANT retracted position.
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when Remember that a retracted cargo cover may
Move the cover and its attachment pins care-
opening and closing with the automatic* obstruct rearward visibility.
fully forward and up over the hooks.
cargo cover.
> The cover retracts until it stops in the Removal
loading position. In retracted position:
Returning to full-cover position from loading posi- IMPORTANT 1. Depress the button on one of the retracted
tion: If the cargo area is loaded with a bulky load cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that
1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out then the automatic* cargo cover is moved to end.
to the end position. retracted position in order to avoid it making 2. Angle the cover up/out carefully.
contact with the load.
2. Release the handle so that the attachment > The other end piece loosens automatically
pins hook into the hooks. and the cover can be lifted out of the
> The cover is locked in the full-cover posi- cargo area.
tion.
Related information
With an automatic* cargo cover, the cover will be • Recommendations for loading (p. 227)
retracted from full-cover position to loading posi- • Safety grille* (p. 234)
232 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory. 233
LOADING AND STORAGE
Rear fitting:
Press the button on each side of the cas-
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward. sette in order to release the end pieces from
the mounting eyelets. Lift out the safety net.
2. Align the safety net cassette's anchor rails in
front of the backrest's attachment lugs. Front fitting:
3. Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs. Slide the cassette from the attachment lugs
and lift out the safety net.
4. Pull up the net.
5. Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks Related information
• Recommendations for loading (p. 227) For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
into the front roof mounting and then press it
be attached and anchored correctly.
forward to the end position. • Safety grille* (p. 234)
6. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining • Cargo cover* (p. 231) WARNING
hooks on the opposite side and press it for- • Load retaining eyelets (p. 229)
ward to the end position. Under no circumstances may anybody remain
in the cargo area while the car is moving. This
Removing and storing is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
1. Undo the safety net from the roof mountings
by pressing the retaining hooks backwards.
Allow the net to roll into the cassette.
234 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory. 235
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key key then has a range extending in a semicircle can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be
The remote control key locks/unlocks the doors, with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) out programmed and used for one single car. If addi-
tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote control from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre tional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles
key needs to be inside the car for it to be (3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively. See are added - one per new remote control key. This
started. the section "Remote control key range". also applies for the key tag.
With keyless starting and keyless locking/unlock- In the event of a lost key, see the heading "Loss
ing, the remote control key can be located any- of a remote control key" below.
where in the passenger compartment or the
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start Remote control key buttons
the car.
Each of the remote control keys that are supplied
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with
unique settings for the car. When a key with a
specific profile is used, the car's settings are
adjusted to match the settings for that profile.
See the section "Driver profiles".
1 The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water.
238 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
unlocking from the outside" and "Locking/ WARNING If there is still interference - use the remote con-
unlocking from the inside". trol key's key blade and then place the key in the
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks power windows and sunroof are de-energised
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the car. See section "Locking/unlocking with the
by always taking the remote control key with
alarm. A longer press opens all the windows you when you leave the car. detachable key blade".
simultaneously, also called Global opening2.
See the section "Locking/unlocking from the NOTE
outside". NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and Be aware of the risk of locking the remote cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper- control key/Key Tag in the car. metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
matically when the button is held depressed. will be deactivated when the car is locked and are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
The tailgate is also closed with a long press - the alarm is armed using another valid key. to each other in the cup holder can cause
acoustic warning signals sound. See the sec- The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated. interference with each other.
tion "Power operated tailgate".
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
Panic function – Used to attract attention car is unlocked. Loss of a remote control key
in an emergency. Press and hold the button If you lose a remote control key then a new one
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators Interference Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
and the horn. The function can be turned off Remote control key functions for keyless starting remote control keys must be taken to the work-
with the same button once it has been active and keyless locking/unlocking* can be disrupted shop. The code of the missing key must be
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func- by electromagnetic fields and screening. erased from the system as a theft prevention
tion switches off automatically after measure.
3 minutes. NOTE
The current number of keys registered to the car
Avoid storing the remote control key close to can be checked in the centre display's top view.
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers - Related information
preferably no closer than 10-15 cm • Remote control key range (p. 240)
(4-6 inches). • Detachable key blade (p. 253)
2 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather. }}
* Option/accessory. 239
LOCKS AND ALARM
• Replacing the battery in the remote control Remote control key range cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres
key (p. 260) In order for the remote control key to work prop- (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 247) erly it needs to be within a certain distance from (3 feet) from the tailgate.
the car.
• Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 243)
NOTE
• Driver profiles (p. 177) For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock- The remote control key functions may be dis-
• Starting the car (p. 412)
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on
• Red Key - Restricted remote control key* topographical conditions, etc. The car can
(p. 241) or have a range that extends approx.
always be locked/unlocked with the key
20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
blade.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
If the remote control key is removed
For keyless use3 from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is run-
ning, the warning message Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered • Remote control key (p. 238)
by the system's antennas. • Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
For keyless use, a remote control key or the but- tem (p. 242)
ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-
3 Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
240 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Red Key - Restricted remote control car - at least one must be a normal remote con- Speed reminder4 (On/Off):
key* trol key. • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
A Red Key enables the car owner to set limits for The settings for Red Key are made by the user of • Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
certain car properties. The restrictions are the normal remote control key from the centre 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
intended to promote safe driving of the car, e.g. display's top view; go to: Settings System
when it is loaned out.
• Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Driver Profiles Red Keys • Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
Some of the car's driver support functions cannot Muted max. volume4 (On/Off):
be deactivated by the user of a Red Key. • Setting at first use: On
The restrictions are intended to act as measures Adaptive cruise control*:
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it • Setting at first use: Longest intervals
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri-
vers, valet parking or a workshop. The settings • See the section "Adaptive cruise control" for
more information
cannot be changed by the person using a Red
Key. Driver support functions
Possible settings The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
The following settings can be made to apply for a
Red Key: • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* - see section
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's "Blind Spot Information"
Speed limiter (Speed Limiter)4 (On/Off):
maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter-
• Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph) • Lane assistance (LDW and LKA)* - see sec-
mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. tion "Lane assistance"
In addition, some of the car's driver support sys- • Setting during first use is 120 km/h
tems will always be active. Other functions of the (75 mph) • Distance warning* - see section "Distance
warning"
key are the same as those of a normal remote • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
control key. The driver display shows the symbol • City Safety - see section "City Safety"
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a and message • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - see section
Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restric- "Driver Alert Control"
Red key Speed limitation cannot
tions can be programmed and used for a single be exceeded. • Road Sign Information* - see section "Road
Sign Information".
* Option/accessory. 241
LOCKS AND ALARM
Antenna locations.
Under the cup holder in the front section of
the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door6
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door6
In the cargo area6
5 The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
6 Only in cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
242 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking from the outside activated when all the doors and the tailgate are Settings for remote-controlled unlocking
The car is locked/unlocked from the outside closed and locked. It is possible to select different sequences for
using buttons on the remote control key or with unlocking.
NOTE
the door or tailgate handles if the car is equip- 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
ped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
view.
Entry)*. The tailgate can be operated via power control key/Key Tag in the car.
operation* and/or foot movement*. 2. Press My Car Locking Remote and
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and Interior Unlock.
Locking/unlocking with the remote the alarm is armed using another valid key. 3. Select option:
control key The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated.
• All Doors
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
car is unlocked.
• Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
WARNING
the doors requires two presses on the
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- remote control key's unlock button.
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. The settings made for the Remote and Interior
Unlock function also affect central unlocking via
opening handles from the inside. For more infor-
Unlocking
mation about how unlocking from the inside is
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote
affected, see the section "Locking/unlocking
control key, the battery may be discharged - in
The buttons on the remote control key can be from the inside".
which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with
used to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate the detachable key blade. See the section
simultaneously.
Keyless* locking/unlocking
"Detachable key blade" for more information. If the car is equipped with keyless locking/
Locking unlocking*, it is sufficient to have the remote con-
The driver's door must be closed in order for the NOTE trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
lock sequence to be activated. If any of the other Always try moving closer to the car and mak- making it more convenient to open the car if your
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not ing another unlock attempt. hands are full. For information on the system's
locked and their alarms armed* until they are range, see the section "Remote control key
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are range".
}}
* Option/accessory. 243
LOCKS AND ALARM
244 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Settings for Keyless entry • Remote control key range (p. 240) Indication on locking/unlocking the
It is possible to select different sequences for • Detachable key blade (p. 253) car
Keyless entry. When the car is locked or unlocked using the
• Alarm* (p. 265)
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top remote control key, the direction indicators con-
view. firm that locking/unlocking was correctly per-
formed.
2. Tap on My Car Locking Keyless
Unlock It is possible to separately adapt the indication for
locking/unlocking, see the heading "Select how
3. Select option: the car confirms locking and unlocking" for set-
• All Doors ting options.
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
• Single Door
- unlocks selected door.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
Related information
• Remote control key (p. 238)
• Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 250)
• Power operated tailgate* (p. 255)
}}
* Option/accessory. 245
LOCKS AND ALARM
246 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
In all doors* Read more about indication of locking/unlocking Locking/unlocking from the inside
in section "Approach lighting" and "Adjusting the The doors and tailgate can be locked and
door mirrors". unlocked from inside using the central locking
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
Related information
the rear doors each lock their own rear door.
• Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 243)
• Approach light duration (p. 151) Central locking
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 156)
}}
* Option/accessory. 247
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| A long press on the button opens all the side Locking Settings for automatic locking
windows simultaneously - also called global – Press the button - both front doors must The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
opening10. be closed. when the car starts to move. To change this set-
ting:
Alternative unlocking method > All doors and the tailgate are locked.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
A long press on the button closes all side view.
windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
2. Press My Car Locking.
Lock button* rear doors
3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to
deactivate/activate this function.
Related information
• Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 243)
• Indication on locking/unlocking the car
(p. 245)
• Child safety locks (p. 264)
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the front
door.
– Pull the opening handle on one of the front
doors and release.
> If the All Doors option is selected for the Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
Remote and Interior Unlock function The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec-
for the remote control key, all doors will be tive rear door.
unlocked. If the Single Door option is
To unlock the rear door:
selected, only this front door will be
unlocked and opened. – Pull the door handle - the rear door unlocks
and opens.
The options are selected in the settings view. For
more information, see the section "Locking/
unlocking from the outside".
10 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.
248 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory. 249
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking the tailgate 1. Press the remote control key's button. Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and > The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
opened in different ways depending on the ment panel extinguishes in order to show
equipment level of the car. that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
control key The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed while the doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres-
Rubber plate with pressure-sensitive surface.
sure plate beneath the tailgate handle
and open the tailgate. The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
You simply need to have the remote control key
If the tailgate is not opened within
in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag.
2 minutes then it is relocked and the
alarm is re-armed. 1. To open the tailgate - lightly press on the
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tail- rubberised pressure plate beneath the tail-
2. With the power operated tailgate option* -
gate unlocked by using the remote control key's gate handle.
button. Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the > The lock is released.
remote control key's button
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened, NOTE
while the doors remain locked and their
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
alarm functions armed.
close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
range" for more information.
250 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully Unlocking the tailgate from the inside Related information
open the tailgate. of the car • Remote control key (p. 238)
1. • Remote control key range (p. 240)
IMPORTANT
• Power operated tailgate* (p. 255)
• Minimal force is required to release the
• Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub-
ment* (p. 258)
berised panel.
• Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the rub-
ber panel.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic Brief press on the button on the instru-
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car ment panel.
through the cargo area. > The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubber-
ised pressure plate.
2. With the power operated tailgate option* -
Long press on the button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate opens.
* Option/accessory. 251
LOCKS AND ALARM
252 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
The key blade's application areas Return the key blade to its intended position
Using the remote control key's detachable key Hold the remote control key with the in the remote control key after use.
blade: front visible and the Volvo logo facing the Refit the shell by pressing it downward
• the left-hand11 front door can be opened right way - slide the button at bottom edge until a clicking sound is heard.
manually if central locking cannot be acti- by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
vated with the remote control key. side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Then slide the shell back sedan.
• all doors are emergency locked - see the > A further click will indicate that the shell is
The shell will then come free and can be
section "Locking/unlocking with detachable securely attached.
lifted off the key.
key blade".
Related information
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
can be activated/deactivated - see the sec- blade (p. 254)
tion "Child safety locks".
• Child safety locks (p. 264)
The button-less key12 (Key Tag) does not have a
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the
• Remote control key (p. 238)
detachable key blade from the normal remote
control key.
* Option/accessory. 253
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking with the 5. Pull out the handle. 2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and
detachable key blade > The door opens. release it.
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade > The control automatically returns to its
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
can be used to unlock the car from the outside - starting position - the alarm signal stops
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
e.g. if the remote control key's battery has and the alarm switches off.
clockwise in step (3).
become discharged.
Switching off the alarm* Locking
Unlocking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
NOTE
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
When the door is unlocked using the key has become discharged.
blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig-
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
gered.
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
Pull out the front door handle on the left- them being opened from outside.
hand side13 to its end position so that the The doors can still be opened from the inside.
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
blade is pointing straight back.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
1. Place the remote control key in the backup
position. Remove the key from the lock cylin-
reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the
der and release the handle so that the rear
tunnel console.
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.
254 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory. 255
LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
Opening/closing button on the instrument panel. close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
Closing range" for more information.
The tailgate can be closed via the instrument Button for closing and locking on the underside of the
panel's button, with foot movement*, with the tailgate.
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- NOTE
remote control key or the buttons14 along the
gate remains unlocked.
bottom edge of the tailgate. When using key-free* blocking/closing, three
Choose one of the following options to close the signals will sound if the key is not detected
NOTE
tailgate: sufficiently close to the tailgate. See the sec-
The button is active 24 hours after the hatch tions "Remote key range" and "Locks and
– Long press on the instrument panel's has been left open. Thereafter, it must be remote keys" for more information.
button or the remote control key's but- closed manually.
ton.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
IMPORTANT
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked. During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be dam-
aged and stop working correctly.
14 A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
256 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Cancel opening/closing 2. Press the button on the underside of and the tailgate returns to the programmed
– Cancel opening/closing in one of the follow- the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. max. position.
ing ways: > Two short acoustic signals sound to indi-
• Press the button on the instrument panel. cate that the set position has been saved. WARNING
• Press the remote control key's button. To reset max. opening: Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
• Press the close button14 along the bottom – Manually move the tailgate to its highest check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
edge of the tailgate. possible position - press the button on as trapping may have serious consequences.
• Press the rubberised pressure plate the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. Always operate the tailgate with caution.
beneath the outside handle. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
• Using the foot movement* (see section that the set position has been cleared. Pre-tensioned springs
"Opening/closing power operated tailgate The tailgate will then assume its max.
with foot movement" for more informa- position when opened.
tion).
> Tailgate movement will be interrupted and NOTE
the tailgate will stop and can then be • If the system has been operating continu-
manoeuvred manually. ously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
Programmable max. opening
about 2 minutes.
The maximum opening position of the tailgate
can be adjusted, e.g. to suit a low ceiling height in
a garage. Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
To adjust max. opening:
the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail-
1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi- protection is activated. gate.
tion.
• During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
sounds.
• During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds
14 A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. }}
* Option/accessory. 257
LOCKS AND ALARM
15 See the section "Remote control key range" for more information.
258 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Opening/closing If several kicking motions take place without an • Remote control key range (p. 240)
approved remote control key being located
NOTE behind the car, opening will not be possible until
after a certain delay.
The foot-operated tailgate function is availa-
ble in two versions: Do not leave your foot positioned under the car
during the kicking motion. This could cause acti-
• Opening and closing with foot movement vation to fail.
• Only unlocking with foot movement (lift Cancel opening/closing
up the tailgate manually to open it) – Make one slow forward kicking motion when
Note that the function for opening and clos- opening/closing is in progress in order to
ing with foot movement requires the "Power stop the movement of the tailgate.
operated tailgate"* option.
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening/closing.
– Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper. Then NOTE
take a step back. The bumper must not be
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
touched.
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
> A short acoustic signal sounds when large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
opening/closing is activated - the tailgate this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
is opened/closed.
If the tailgate is on open position then it is
always closed on activation via foot move- NOTE
ment. Pay attention to the possibility that the sys-
tem may be activated in a car wash or similar
The tailgate can also be closed via the instrument
if the remote key is within range.
panel's button, the remote control key or the but-
ton(s)16 under the tailgate. For more information,
see the section "Power operated tailgate". Related information
• Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 250)
• Power operated tailgate* (p. 255)
* Option/accessory. 259
LOCKS AND ALARM
Replacing the battery in the remote The battery in the button-less key17 (Key Tag) Opening and changing
control key cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered
The battery in the remote control key needs to from an authorised Volvo workshop.
be replaced when it has become discharged.
IMPORTANT
NOTE A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
All batteries have a limited service life and to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
must eventually be replaced (does not apply must be deleted from the car since it is still
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var- possible to use it to start the car via back-up
ies depending on how often the vehicle/key start.
is used. Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
The battery for the remote control key should be right way - slide the button at bottom edge
replaced if: by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
the information symbol illuminates and
the message Car key battery low The shell will then come free and can be
See Owner's manual is shown in the lifted off the key.
driver display
and/or
• the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
(65 feet) of the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
17 This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).
260 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Turn the key, move the button to the side Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat- The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
and slide the back shell a few millimetres tery cover anticlockwise until the markings carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
upwards. meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by press- IMPORTANT
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key. ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess. Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
Then prize the battery cover upwards. tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
}}
261
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Reposition the rear side's shell and press
Avoid touching the remote control key's bat- it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
tery contacts with your fingers.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
Place the battery in the holder with the
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
properly positioned and securely attached.
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch. Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
262
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory. 263
LOCKS AND ALARM
Child safety locks 2. Press the button in the driver's door control Symbol Message Specification
The child safety locks prevent children from panel.
being able to open a rear door from the inside. > The driver display shows the message Rear child Child safety
There is an electric* and a manual lock. Rear child lock Activated and the but- lock Acti- locks are acti-
ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are vated vated.
Electric activation/deactivation* active.
The electric child safety locks can be activated/ Rear child Child safety
deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. When the electric child safety lock is active then lock Deacti- locks are deacti-
Activation/deactivation can be performed up to the rear: vated vated.
2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided • windows can only be opened with the driver's
that no door is opened. See the section "Ignition door control panel Manual activation/deactivation
position" for more information.
• doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
– Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are acti-
vated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man-
Button for electric activation/deactivation. started. ual door locks.
1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi- – Use the remote control key's detachable key
tion higher than 0. blade to turn the knob. For more information,
see the section "Detachable key blade".
264 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory. 265
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Deactivate the alarm Lock and alarm indicator Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows: order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans-
• press the remote control key's unlock button
port on a car train or car ferry. The procedure is
• grip one of the door handles20 the same as with the temporary disengagement
• push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure of the "Deadlock" function.
plate20. Press the Reduced guard
button in the centre display's
Switching off a triggered alarm function view in order to switch
– Press the remote control key's unlock button off the movement and tilt
or set the car in ignition position I by turning detectors temporarily.
the start knob clockwise and then releasing.
NOTE A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the Related information
• Remember that the alarm is activated alarm system's status: • Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
when the car is locked. (p. 267)
• LED not lit – alarm not armed.
• If any of the doors are opened from the • Disarming the alarm* without working remote
inside then the alarm is triggered. • The LED flashes once every other second – control key (p. 267)
alarm is armed.
• Deadlocks* (p. 249)
• After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED
Alarm signals flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds
When the alarm has been triggered, the following or until ignition position I has been selected
happens: by turning the start knob clockwise and
• A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.
alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt
or until the alarm is switched off. detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times21.
266 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key 1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors key blade.
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then > The alarm is triggered.
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is
relocked at the same time.
In certain markets, the alarm is re-armed auto-
matically after a certain delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without being
locked.
Related information
• Alarm* (p. 265)
• Disarming the alarm* without working remote The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
control key (p. 267)
2. Place the remote control key in the backup
reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Related information
• Alarm* (p. 265)
• Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
(p. 267)
• Detachable key blade (p. 253)
• Starting the car (p. 412)
* Option/accessory. 267
LOCKS AND ALARM
Type approval for the remote Lock system keyless start (Passive
control key system Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
Type approval for the remote control key system (Passive Entry*)
can be read in the table.
268 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
269
LOCKS AND ALARM
270
LOCKS AND ALARM
Serbia
}}
271
LOCKS AND ALARM
Namibia TA-2015-102
272
LOCKS AND ALARM
Key Tag
Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia
perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman
}}
273
LOCKS AND ALARM
274
LOCKS AND ALARM
Related information
• Remote control key (p. 238)
275
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed-dependent steering force Settings My Car Drive Modes Electronic Stability Control ESC1
Speed related power steering causes the steer- Steering force Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps the
ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the Steering force selection cannot be accessed dur- driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv- ing a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph). traction.
ity.
Related information The activation of the ESC sys-
On motorways the steering feels firmer. When tem during braking may be
parking and at low speed steering is light and • Drive modes* (p. 426)
noticed as a throbbing sound.
requires only a slight effort. The car may accelerate slower
than expected when the accel-
NOTE erator pedal is depressed.
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be tempo- WARNING
rarily cooled - during this time the power
• The stability system ESC is supplemen-
steering operates with reduced power and tary driver support intended to facilitate
turning the steering wheel may then be per- driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
ceived to be slightly heavier. dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer- road conditions.
ing assistance, the driver display shows a • ESC is not a substitute for the driver's
message. attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
Change the steering force level* driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
modes" section and see the description at the other vehicles, and in accordance with
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading current traffic rules and regulations.
"Selectable drive modes".
For the car models without a drive mode control The ESC system consists of the following func-
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of tions:
steering force is instead made via the centre dis- • Active Yaw Control
play's top view and the following search path:
• Spin Control
278 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Traction control system Trailer stability assist*3 Sport mode for electronic stability
• Engine Drag Control Trailer Stability Assist (TSA4) stabilises a car with control
attached trailer in situations where snaking The ESC5 system is always activated — it can-
• Trailer stability assist
occurs. Also see section "Trailer Stability Assist" not be switched off. However, the driver can
Active Yaw Control for more information. select Sport mode, which allows for a more
The function checks the driving and brake force active driving experience.
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the NOTE
car. In Sport mode the ESC system detects whether
The TSA function is deactivated if sport mode the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements
Spin Control is activated. and cornering are more active than in normal
The function prevents the driving wheels from driving and then allows a certain degree of con-
spinning against the road surface during acceler- Related information trolled skidding with the rear section before ESC
ation. intervenes and stabilises the car.
• Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 279) For example, if the driver stops a controlled skid
Traction control system
• Symbols and messages for electronic stabil- by releasing the accelerator pedal, the ESC sys-
The function is active at low speed and transfers
ity control (p. 281) tem intervenes and stabilises the car.
power from the driving wheel that is spinning to
the one that is not. • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 457) Sport mode also provides maximum traction if the
car has become bogged down or is driving on a
Engine Drag Control loose surface, such as sand or deep snow.
Engine Drag Control (EDC2) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine Select/deselect Sport mode
braking when driving in low gear on slippery road The Sport mode is activated/
surfaces. deactivated in the centre dis-
play's function view.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
* Option/accessory. 279
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 278)
• Speed limiter* (p. 283)
• Cruise control (p. 290)
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
280 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis-
electronic stability control play.
A number of symbols and messages regarding The following table shows some examples.
electronic stability control (Electronic Stability
ESC ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva-
ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.
Temporarily off
See message in the driver display.
ESC ESC system disengaged.
Service required • Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
ing the button, located in the centre of the authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
}}
281
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information
• Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 278)
• Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 279)
• Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 113)
282
DRIVER SUPPORT
6 Speed Limiter
7 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 283
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting the Speed mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h Managing speed for the Speed
limiter (20 mph). limiter
The speed limiter function (SL8) must first be – When the speed limiter is in standby mode The speed limiter (SL9) can be set to different
selected and activated in order to be able to reg- speeds.
ulate the speed. and the symbol is shown - press the
steering wheel button (2). Setting/changing the stored speed
Set the speed limiter in standby mode > The Speed Limiter starts and the current
speed is stored as the maximum speed.
Related information
• Speed limiter* (p. 283)
• Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 284)
• Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter
(p. 285)
• Switching off the speed limiter (p. 286)
8 Speed Limiter
9 Speed Limiter
284 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
• The speed set after the last button press is Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
stored in the memory. Limiter standby mode
Related information The speed limiter (SL10) can be temporarily
deactivated so that it is set in standby mode and
• Speed limiter* (p. 283)
can be reactivated later.
• Activating and starting the Speed limiter
(p. 284) Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it
• Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter in standby mode
(p. 285)
• Switching off the speed limiter (p. 286)
10 Speed Limiter }}
* Option/accessory. 285
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Temporary increase in speed with the Switching off the speed limiter Related information
accelerator pedal The speed limiter (SL11) can be deactivated. • Speed limiter* (p. 283)
The speed limiter can also be temporarily overrid- • Activating and starting the Speed limiter
den with the accelerator pedal without the speed (p. 284)
limiter being set in standby mode - e.g. to be able
to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation. • Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 284)
In which case, proceed as follows:
• Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and (p. 285)
release it so that acceleration is interrupted
when the desired speed has been reached.
> In this case, the speed limiter is still acti-
vated and the driver display's symbol is
therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
temporary acceleration is finished. depending on car model.
> The car is then braked automatically
below the last stored maximum speed. 1. Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.
Related information
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
• Speed limiter* (p. 283)
(3) to change to another function.
• Activating and starting the Speed limiter
> The driver display's symbol and indicator
(p. 284)
for speed limiter (4) are switched off -
• Managing speed for the Speed limiter which deletes the set/stored maximum
(p. 284) speed.
• Switching off the speed limiter (p. 286) 3. Press the steering wheel button (2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
11 Speed Limiter
286 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
• ASL is not a substitute for the driver's A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
attention and judgement. The driver is B See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean-
ing of the symbol's colour.
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
• See also the heading "Limitations for
Road Sign Information".
* Option/accessory. 287
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| The ASL symbol The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI14 func- Activating/deactivating the
The sign symbol (displayed alongside tion can once again interpret and provide speed automatic speed limiter
the stored speed, "70", in the centre of information to the ASL. The automatic speed limiter function (ASL15)
the speedometer) can be shown in can be activated and deactivated as a supple-
See also the heading "Limitations for Road Sign
three colours with the following mean- ment to the speed limiter (SL16).
Information".
ings:
Related information Activate ASL
Colour of sign Meaning • Speed limiter* (p. 283) The Speed Sign Assist but-
symbol ton is located in the function
• Activating/deactivating the automatic speed
view of the centre display.
Greenish yellow ASL is active limiter (p. 288)
• Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
Grey ASL has been set in speed limiter (p. 289)
standby mode
• Road Sign Information* (p. 364)
Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary standby To activate the automatic speed limiter:
mode - e.g. due to a traffic
• Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 369) 1. Press the Speed Sign Assist button.
sign not being read. > ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi-
cator appears on the button, and the
Limitations of ASL driver display shows a sign symbol in the
Automatic speed limitation takes place using centre of the speedometer.
speed information from the RSI14 function - not
from the speed limit road signs that the car 2. Press the steering wheel button .
passes. > ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
If RSI14 cannot interpret and provide speed infor-
mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby
mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the
driver must intervene and brake to a suitable
speed.
288 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivate ASL Changing the tolerance for the – Press the steering wheel button (1)
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter: Automatic speed limiter until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the
– Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL17) speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h
function view. can be set for different tolerance levels. (47 mph).
> ASL is deactivated and the button's indi- > After which, the car uses the selected tol-
It is possible to increase/decrease the signed erance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs
cation becomes GREY - SL is activated speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a
instead. passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).
signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the
driver can instead choose to allow the car to The tolerance is followed until a road sign
WARNING maintain 75 km/h (47 mph). with a lower or higher speed is passed -
then the car follows the new signed
After switching from ASL to SL the car will no
longer follow the signed speed limit but only speed limit instead and the tolerance is
the maximum speed stored in memory. deleted from the memory.
If the Road Sign Information* function is
activated, the signed speed limit will then
Related information be shown with a RED indicator on the
• Automatic speed limiter* (p. 287) speedometer.
• Changing the tolerance for the Automatic The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the
speed limiter (p. 289) speed setting is in the speed limiter.
NOTE
Buttons and symbols for functions18. The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information
• Automatic speed limiter* (p. 287)
• Activating/deactivating the automatic speed
limiter (p. 288)
* Option/accessory. 289
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Managing speed for the Speed limiter Cruise control : Reduces stored speed
(p. 284) The cruise control (CC19) helps the driver main- Marker for stored speed
• Road Sign Information* (p. 364) tain an even speed, resulting in more relaxed
• Speed limiter* (p. 283) driving on motorways and long, straight roads in The car's current speed
regular traffic flows.
Stored speed
Overview
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
19 Cruise Control
20 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
290 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298) Activating and starting the Cruise
control
• The cruise control function is supplemen-
The cruise control function (CC21) must first be
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving – it cannot handle all situations in selected and activated in order to be able to reg-
all traffic, weather and road conditions. ulate the speed.
* Option/accessory. 291
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed Managing speed for the Cruise • The speed set after the last button press is
that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph). control stored in the memory.
To start the cruise control: Cruise control (CC22) can be set to different If the driver increases the car's speed using the
speeds. accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
–
With the symbol/function displayed, wheel button (1), the speed stored will be
Setting/changing the stored speed the car's speed when the button is depressed,
press the steering wheel button (2).
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator
> Cruise Control starts and the current
pedal at the moment when the button is
speed becomes the stored speed.
depressed.
21 Cruise Control
22 Cruise Control
292
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control dependence on drive Deactivating/reactivating the cruise Standby mode on driver intervention
mode control The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and
The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed Cruise control (CC24) can be temporarily deacti- set in standby mode if:
may vary depending on the selected drive vated so that it is set in the standby mode and • the foot brake is used
mode23. can be reactivated later.
• the gear selector is moved to N position
Cruise control Eco Cruise Deactivate Cruise Control and set in • the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer
In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelera- standby mode than 1 minute
tions and decelerations become smoother com-
pared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and • the driver maintains a speed higher than the
environmental economy. This can cause the car's stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
speed to be temporarily above or below the set The driver must then control the speed himself/
speed. herself.
See supplementary information in "ECO drive A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
mode" under "Cruise control Eco Cruise". tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
Cruise control Dynamic Cruise the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accel-
erations and decelerations are felt more strongly Automatic standby mode
and seem more direct compared to other modes. Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
Related information NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
• Cruise control (p. 290) depending on car model. • wheels lose traction
• Activating and starting the Cruise control To set cruise control in standby mode: • engine speed is too low/high
(p. 291)
–
• brake temperature is too high
Press the steering wheel button (2).
• Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
> The cruise control markings and symbols
• speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
(p. 293) The driver must then control the speed himself/
in the driver display change colour from
• Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 294) WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now herself.
• Drive modes* (p. 426) temporarily deactivated and the driver
must then manually control the speed.
• Drive mode ECO (p. 428)
* Option/accessory. 293
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Cruise control (p. 290)
• Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 291)
• Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 292)
• Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 294)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To start cruise control from standby mode:
– Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the most recently stored speed again.
or
To start cruise control from standby mode:
– Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the current speed.
294
DRIVER SUPPORT
25 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
26 Distance Alert }}
* Option/accessory. 295
DRIVER SUPPORT
27 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
28 Distance Alert
296 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The same symbol is also shown when the adap- NOTE Limitations of Distance Warning*
tive cruise control function is activated. The Distance Warning function29 may have limi-
• The higher the speed the longer the cal-
tations in certain situations.
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
WARNING
• Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations. • The Distance Warning function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
• The set time window is also used by the
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
functions.
and road conditions.
• The vehicle's size may affect the ability to
WARNING detect, e.g. motorcycles, which could
mean that the warning lamp illuminates at
• Only use a time window that suits the
a shorter time window than set or that the
Control for time interval. current traffic conditions.
warning is temporarily absent.
Decrease time interval • The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time • Extremely high speeds can cause the
Increase time interval available to react and take action if an lamp to illuminate at a shorter time win-
unexpected traffic situation arises. dow than that set due to limitations in
Distance indicator radar unit range.
– Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to Related information • Distance Warning is not a substitute for
increase or decrease the time interval. the driver's attention and judgement. The
• Distance Warning* (p. 295)
driver is always responsible for ensuring
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
• Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 297) the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298) appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
29 Distance Alert }}
* Option/accessory. 297
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Adaptive cruise control* is clear again the car returns to the selected
The adaptive cruise control (ACC30) helps the speed.
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section driver to maintain an even speed combined with
a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead. WARNING
"Limitations for radar unit".
An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax- • The adaptive cruise control function is
ing driving experience on long journeys on motor- supplementary driver support intended to
Related information facilitate driving and make it safer – it
• Distance Warning* (p. 295) ways and long straight main roads in smooth traf-
fic flows. cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
• Activating and setting the time interval for weather and road conditions.
Distance warning* (p. 296)
• The driver is advised to read all sections
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 332) in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
• The adaptive cruise control is not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always responsi-
ble for ensuring the car is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
vehicle ahead31. and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and
radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with
car, the speed is adapted automatically via the acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used to adjust the speed.
298 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
31 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
299
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead Driver display Collision risk warning
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle at the preset
time interval
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Indication of speeds31. Audio and symbol for collision warning31
Stored speed Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
Current speed of your car. sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
To see different combinations of symbols
radar unit
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the
control". capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be
braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise
control is capable of and the driver does not
brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are
activated to alert the driver that immediate inter-
vention is required.
31 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
300 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The adaptive cruise control only warns of Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
vehicles which its radar unit has detected - trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
hence a warning may not be given, or it may not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
be given with a certain delay. ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
• Never wait for a warning. Apply the to recognise.
brakes when the situation requires.
Related information
Head-up display* • Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 302)
• Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 303)
• Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 304)
• Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 306)
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308)
• Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 309)
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen31.
In cars equipped with a head-up display, the
• Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 310)
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing
symbol. • Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 311)
• Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
cruise control* (p. 313)
• Distance Warning* (p. 295)
31 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 301
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting the Adaptive Starting/activating the adaptive cruise – With the symbol/function (4) displayed,
cruise control* control press the steering wheel button (1).
Adaptive cruise control (ACC32) must first be In order to start the ACC the following require-
> Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur-
activated and then started if it is to control the ments apply:
rent speed is stored, which is shown in
speed and distance. • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and figures in the centre of the speedometer.
the driver's door must be closed.
Setting the adaptive cruise control in The time interval is only
standby mode • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") adjusted to the vehicle ahead
within reasonable distance in front of the car, by the ACC when the distance
or the current speed must be at least symbol shows two vehicles.
15 km/h (9 mph).
• For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model. • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
Immediately after the engine is started the Adap- • Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set control* (p. 303)
it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as • Setting the time interval for the adaptive
follows: NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary cruise control* (p. 304)
depending on car model.
– Press steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to • Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
scroll to the symbol/function (4). control* (p. 306)
> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive • Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
Cruise Control is set in standby mode. control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308)
302 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Change of target and automatic braking with Managing the speed of the Adaptive • The speed set after the last button press is
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 309) cruise control* stored in the memory.
• Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* The adaptive cruise control (ACC33) can be set If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
(p. 310) to different speeds. accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
• Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
Setting/changing the stored speed
wheel button , the speed stored will be the
cruise control* (p. 313) car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
• Change between Cruise control and adaptive
the moment when the button is depressed.
cruise control* (p. 311)
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
• Distance Warning* (p. 295)
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic gearbox
Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model. adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -
even though it is capable of following another
– Change the set speed with short or long vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
presses on steering wheel button (1) or 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
(3): The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
• Short press: Each press changes the (125 mph).
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
• Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
* Option/accessory. 303
DRIVER SUPPORT
304 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Select one of the following alternatives: • Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 310)
• The higher the speed the longer the cal- • Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy,
culated distance in metres for a given which means longer time interval to the vehi- • Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
time interval. cle ahead. cruise control* (p. 313)
• Only use the time intervals permitted by • Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set • Change between Cruise control and adaptive
local traffic regulations. time interval to the vehicle ahead as cruise control* (p. 311)
smoothly as possible. • Distance Warning* (p. 295)
• If the adaptive cruise control does not
seem to respond with a speed increase • Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set • Drive modes* (p. 426)
when activated, it may be because the time interval to the vehicle ahead more
closely, which in certain cases may mean • Drive mode ECO (p. 428)
time window to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time window. heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec-
tions.
WARNING
More information can also be found under
• Only use a time window that suits the "Cruise control Eco Cruise" in section "Drive
current traffic conditions. mode ECO".
• The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time Related information
available to react and take action if an • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
unexpected traffic situation arises. • Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 302)
Select how ACC shall maintain the • Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
distance* to the vehicle ahead control* (p. 303)
The driver can select different driving styles for • Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
how the Adaptive cruise control should maintain control* (p. 306)
the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control • Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
DRIVE MODE. control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308)
• Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 309)
* Option/accessory. 305
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control • the driver maintains a speed higher than the
cruise control* and set it in standby mode: stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC35) can be – Press the steering wheel button (2). • the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
> The symbol on the driver display
standby mode and can later be reactivated. A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
changes colour from WHITE to GREY and
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and the stored speed in the centre of the
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
set it in standby mode speedometer changes from BEIGE to
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
GREY.
WARNING
• With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene
and regulate both speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
• When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too close
to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of
the short distance by the Distance Warn-
ing function instead.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
306 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
With automatic standby mode, the driver is Reactivating adaptive cruise control
• Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
warned via an acoustic signal and a message control* (p. 302)
on the driver display.
from standby mode
• Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
• The driver must then regulate the car's control* (p. 303)
speed, apply the brakes as needed and • Setting the time interval for the adaptive
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. cruise control* (p. 304)
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
Automatic standby mode may occur if: control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308)
• the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC • Change of target and automatic braking with
is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 309)
stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
• Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
speed bump. (p. 310)
• the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
• Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary cruise control* (p. 313)
longer has a vehicle to follow. depending on car model.
• Change between Cruise control and adaptive
• speed is reduced to below 30 km/h To reactivate ACC from standby mode: cruise control* (p. 311)
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox. – Press the steering wheel button (1). • Distance Warning* (p. 295)
• the driver opens the door > The speed is then set to the most recently • Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 278)
stored speed.
• the driver takes off the seatbelt
* Option/accessory. 307
DRIVER SUPPORT
Overtaking assistance with adaptive Continuation for Overtaking Assistance Limitations for Overtaking Assistance
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* The following conditions must exist for Overtak-
Adaptive cruise control (ACC37) or Pilot Assist ing Assistance to be activated: WARNING
can assist the driver when overtaking other vehi- • there must be a vehicle in front (the “target When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys-
cles. vehicle”) tem, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the condi-
How overtaking assistance works • your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
tions suddenly change.
When ACC or Pilot Assist is following another (43 mph)
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to • the stored speed for ACC or Pilot Assist such as if:
overtake by activating the direction indicator38, must be high enough for overtaking to take
adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist helps by place safely. • the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
accelerating the car towards the vehicle ahead that is in the same direction as overtaking
before the car reaches the overtaking lane. Starting Overtaking Assistance would normally occur.
To start the Overtaking Assistance: • the vehicle ahead slows down before the
The function then delays reducing speed in order
– Activate the direction indicator. driver's car has crossed over into the
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
overtaking lane
is approaching a slower vehicle. Use the left direction indicator in a car with
The function remains active until the driver’s vehi- the steering wheel on the left, or the right • the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
direction indicator in a car with the steering down
cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
wheel on the right. • a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
> Overtaking Assistance is started. with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo-
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate rarily setting ACC or Pilot Assist in standby mode.
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly. Related information
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
308 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Change of target and automatic WARNING front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise
braking with the Adaptive Cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic
When the adaptive cruise control is following
Control another vehicle at speeds in excess of
braking.
In combination with automatic gearbox, the approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is – The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in
adaptive cruise control (ACC39) has functionality changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary one of the following ways:
for change of target and braking at certain vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore
speeds. the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate • Press the steering wheel button .
to the stored speed.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
Change of target • The driver must then intervene him/ > The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol-
herself and brake. lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov-
ing forward within 6 seconds.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target NOTE
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi-
in standby mode: mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking
• when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain disengaged.
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there whether the target object is a stationary vehi- The parking brake must be released before
may be stationary traffic in front. cle or some other object, such as a speed the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.
When adaptive cruise control is following another bump.
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
changes target from a moving to a stationary and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap-
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
for the stationary vehicle. follow.
Automatic braking
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
309
DRIVER SUPPORT
310 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Change between Cruise control and 3. Press the steering wheel button .
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) adaptive cruise control* > Cruise control starts and stores the cur-
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 332) In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC41) rent speed.
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298) the driver can change between Cruise Control
(CC42) and ACC. WARNING
• Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 302) A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise Switching from ACC to CC means that the
control is active: car:
• Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 303) CC ACC • no longer maintains a preset time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
• Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 304) A A • only follows the stored speed, and the
driver must therefore apply the brakes
• Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control when necessary.
control* (p. 306)
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
If CC is active when the engine is switched off,
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308) Changing from ACC to CC ACC will be activated automatically the next time
• Change of target and automatic braking with Proceed as follows: the engine is started.
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 309)
1. Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode Changing from CC to ACC
• Change between Cruise control and adaptive
using steering wheel button . Proceed as follows:
cruise control* (p. 311)
2. Press the Cruise control button in the cen- 1. Set cruise control to standby mode using the
• Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
tre display's function view - the button's indi-
cruise control* (p. 313) steering wheel button.
cator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from ACC to CC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now switched off
and Cruise Control is set to standby
mode.
* Option/accessory. 311
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Cruise control (p. 290)
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
312 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for the The previous illustration45 shows that the adap- (68 mph) and at the same time is following a
Adaptive cruise control* tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.
A number of symbols and messages regarding (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
the adaptive cruise control (ACC43) can be follow.
shown via the driver display and/or the head-up
display*.
* Option/accessory. 313
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
• Road Sign Information* (p. 364)
• Head-up display* (p. 117)
314 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist* The driver selects the desired speed and a time The current status of steering
Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans assistance is indicated by the
between the lane's side markings using steering the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's colour of the steering wheel's
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, side markings on the road surface using the symbol:
combined with a preselected time interval to the camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is
• GREEN steering wheel indi-
vehicle ahead. maintained with automatic speed adjustment
cates active steering assis-
whilst the steering assistance helps to position
tance
How Pilot Assist works the car in the lane.
The Pilot Assist function gives more comfortable • GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi-
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
driving and a more relaxed driving experience cates deactivated steering assistance.
account the speed of the preceding car and the
during, for example, long journeys on motorways lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore
in even traffic flows. the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and
steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or
avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig-
uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not
see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist tempo-
rarily deactivates steering assistance, but
resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again -
although the speed and distance control func-
tions remain active.
WARNING
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the Pilot Assist steering assistance is automati-
vehicle ahead and detects side markings46. cally deactivated and is resumed without prior
warning.
Camera and radar unit
Distance readers
46 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
* Option/accessory. 315
DRIVER SUPPORT
316
DRIVER SUPPORT
When the car approaches an exit or if the lane Overview Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
splits, the driver should steer towards the desired
Controls ▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control to
lane so that Pilot Assist can specify the desired
direction. Pilot Assist
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
the middle of the lane Function symbol
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to posi-
tion the car in between the lane markings and Symbols for target vehicle and time interval
therefore it is recommended to let the car find to vehicles ahead
the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
driving experience as possible. The driver checks assistance
that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and
always has the ability to adjust the position by
making his/her own steering corrections.
Buttons and symbols for functions46.
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an
appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to : Activates Pilot Assist from standby
turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise mode and resumes the stored speed and
control. time interval
: Increases the stored speed
46 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
317
DRIVER SUPPORT
46 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
318
DRIVER SUPPORT
46 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
* Option/accessory. 319
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| With the Adaptive cruise control in standby Hands on the steering wheel • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
mode: In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s (p. 328)
Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot
1.
Assist detects that the driver is not holding the
> The symbol changes to Pilot Assist steering wheel, the driver is prompted to actively
in standby mode (8). steer the car via a text message and an acoustic
2. signal.
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is If Pilot Assist still cannot detect that the driver is
stored, which is shown with figures in the holding the steering wheel, the function shifts to
centre of the speedometer. standby mode. Pilot Assist must then be restar-
ted with the steering wheel button .
...or...
With the Adaptive cruise control started: NOTE
– Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
> Pilot Assist is started. driver has hands on the steering wheel.
Pilot Assist steering assistance
is only active when the steering Related information
wheel symbol (2) has changed • Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
from GREY to GREEN.
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist only regulates the (p. 321)
time interval to the vehicle
• Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle (p. 322)
(1) above the steering wheel symbol.
• Change of target and automatic braking with
At the same time a speed Pilot Assist* (p. 325)
range is marked.
• Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
The higher speed is the (p. 323)
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308)
cle ahead (target vehicle).
• Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 327)
320 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Managing the speed for If the driver increases the car’s speed using the Related information
Pilot Assist* accelerator pedal before pressing the steering • Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds. wheel button , the speed stored will be the • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi- (p. 319)
Setting/changing the stored speed ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed. • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 322)
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
• Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 325)
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released. • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 323)
Automatic gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds • Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph). control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308)
Note that the lowest programmable speed for • Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 327)
Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 (p. 328)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph)
depending on car model.
cannot be selected/stored.
– Change the set speed with short or long
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
presses on steering wheel button (1) or (125 mph).
(3):
Manual gearbox
• Short press: Each press changes the Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h
(+/- 5 mph). (125 mph).
• Press and hold: Release the button when The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is
the desired speed. 200 km/h (125 mph).
• The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
* Option/accessory. 321
DRIVER SUPPORT
322 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Select one of the following alternatives: • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* Deactivating/activating the
• Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy, (p. 328) Pilot Assist*
which means longer time interval to the vehi- • Distance Warning* (p. 295) Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so
cle ahead. that it is set in the standby mode and can be
• Drive modes* (p. 426)
reactivated later.
• Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following • Drive mode ECO (p. 428)
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in
smoothly as possible. standby mode
• Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
more closely, which in certain cases may
mean heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec-
tions.
More information can also be found under
"Cruise control Eco Cruise" in section "Drive
mode ECO".
Related information
• Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
• Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* depending on car model.
(p. 319)
To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 321) standby mode:
• Change of target and automatic braking with
– Press the steering wheel button (2).
Pilot Assist* (p. 325)
> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the
• Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* symbol (8) in the driver display changes
(p. 323) colour from WHITE to GREY and the
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise stored speed in the centre of the speed-
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308) ometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.
• Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 327) ...or...
}}
* Option/accessory. 323
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| – Press the steering wheel button ◀ (3). A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- • the driver's hands are not on the steering
> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect wheel
to the Adaptive cruise control in active the setting - the car returns to the last stored • the parking brake is applied
mode. speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
• engine speed is too low/high
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
WARNING Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen-
• the driver takes off the seatbelt
gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering • one or more wheels lose traction
• With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulat-
assistance is automatically reactivated if the • the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
lane's side markings can still be detected. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
ing both speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead. Automatic standby mode waves are blocked)
• When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot
the car comes too close to a vehicle stability control/anti-skid ESC47. If any of these Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead
ahead, the driver is warned of the short other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
distance by the Distance Warning func- switched off automatically. speed bump.
tion instead. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
WARNING vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no
Standby mode on driver intervention With automatic standby mode, the driver is longer has a vehicle to follow.
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in warned via an acoustic signal and a message • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
standby mode if: on the driver display. (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
• The driver must then regulate the car's gearbox.
• the foot brake is used
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
• the gear selector is moved to N position maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
• the direction indicators are used for longer
than 1 minute. Automatic standby mode may occur if, for exam-
• the driver maintains a speed higher than the ple:
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
• the driver opens the door
• the clutch pedal is depressed for
• brake temperature is high
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with man-
ual gearbox.
324
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reactivating Pilot Assist from the • Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 321) Change of target and automatic
standby mode • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* braking with Pilot Assist*
(p. 322) In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot
Assist has functionality for change of target and
• Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 325) braking at certain speeds.
Related information
• Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
• Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 319)
}}
* Option/accessory. 325
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING – Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following • the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby
way: mode.
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h • Press the steering wheel button . Automatic activation of parking brake
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a In certain situations, the parking brake is applied
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot • Depress the accelerator pedal.
> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle in order to keep the car stationary.
Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and
instead accelerate to the stored speed. ahead if it starts moving forward within This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car
6 seconds. stationary with the foot brake and:
• The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake. • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
NOTE seatbelt
Automatic standby mode with change of Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a • Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for
target maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking more than approx. 5 minutes
Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby brake is applied and the function is disen-
gaged.
• the brakes have overheated
mode:
• the engine is switched off.
• when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the
and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar- parking brake must be released. Related information
get object is a stationary vehicle or some • Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
other object, e.g. a speed bump. Cessation of automatic braking • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
• when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) In some situations, automatic braking ceases on (p. 319)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 321)
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow. standby mode. This means that the brakes are
released and the car may start to roll - the driver • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
Automatic braking must therefore intervene and brake the car him- (p. 322)
For shorter stops in connection with inching in self/herself to keep it stationary. • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automati- (p. 323)
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed This may take place in the following situations:
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 308)
vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot pedal
Assist is set in standby mode with automatic
• the parking brake is applied • Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 327)
braking. • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
• the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi-
(p. 328)
tion
326 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Pilot Assist* WARNING between the car and such obstacles. The
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in driver must ensure him/herself that the
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering car is at a suitable distance from such
certain situations. assistance may have difficulty helping the obstacles.
driver in the right way or it may be automati-
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help cally deactivated - in which case, the use of • The camera and radar sensor does not
the driver in many situations. But the driver is at Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of have the capacity to detect all oncoming
all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis- such situations may be that: objects and obstacles in traffic environ-
tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi- ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
tion in the lane. • the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other. or objects which completely or partially
block the route.
• lane division is unclear, for example, when
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
the event of multiple sets of markings. animals, etc.
• edges or other lines than lane markings • The recommended steering input is force
are present on or near the road, e.g. limited, which means that it cannot always
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- help the driver to steer and keep the car
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or within the lane.
strong shadows.
• the lane is narrow or winding. The driver always has the possibility of correcting
or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by
• the lane contains ridges or holes.
Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to
• weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, the desired position.
snow or fog or slush or impaired view with
poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet Steep roads and/or heavy load
road surface etc. Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist intended for use when driving on level road surfa-
has the following limitations: ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
• High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary
driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case,
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers,
be extra attentive and ready to brake.
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they
may be detected incorrectly as lane mark- • Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
ings, with a subsequent risk of contact load or a trailer is connected to the car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 327
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
• Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
• Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 319)
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 321)
• Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 322)
• Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 325)
328 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The previous illustration49 shows that Pilot Assist The previous illustration49 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
The previous illustration49 shows that Pilot Assist
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
keeping the same speed. keeping the same speed.
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis-
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected. tance since the lane's side markings can be
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
detected.
48 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
49 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
329
DRIVER SUPPORT
49 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
330 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 332)
• Type approval for radar units (p. 336)
• Distance Warning* (p. 295)
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 372)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
• City Safety (p. 344)
* Option/accessory. 331
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of the radar unit The radar unit is placed inside the upper section If the driver display shows this symbol
The radar unit has certain limitations - which in of the windscreen together with the car's camera with the message "Windscreen
turn also limits those functions that use the unit. unit. sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", it means that the
Blocked unit IMPORTANT camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles in front of the car.
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov- Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
ered with ice or snow. and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
view.
50 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
332
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cause Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
or camera view. road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
and radar unit. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
333
DRIVER SUPPORT
334 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 335
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for the car's radar units can be seen in the following table.
Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência
a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓ Modelo: L2C0055TR
1500-15-8065
Brazil
EAN: 07897843840978
Modelo: L2C0054TR
✓ 4122-14-8645
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
Europe ✓ ✓
1999/5/EC. The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety /
2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
TRA
✓ REGISTERED No: ER37536/15
336
DRIVER SUPPORT
37295/POSTEL/2014
✓
4927
Indonesia
38806/SDPPI/2015
✓
4927
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
Korea
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Morocco ✓ ✓ NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
}}
337
DRIVER SUPPORT
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998,
Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000.
To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for
✓ “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Malaysia Type Approval No.:
RALM/21A/0315/S(150520)
Type Approval No.:
✓
RALM/21A/0315/S(150618)
Moldavia ✓ ✓ 1024
TA-2014/1824
✓
APPROVED
South Africa
TA-2014/2390
✓
APPROVED
338
DRIVER SUPPORT
✓ CCAB15LP0560T3
Taiwan
✓ CCAB15LP0680T0
Related information
• Radar unit (p. 330)
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 332)
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 298)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
• BLIS* (p. 356)
* Option/accessory. 339
DRIVER SUPPORT
340 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
51 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
341
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and
covered with ice or snow. radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
view.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road
signals or camera view. surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam- Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
era and radar unit. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light condi-
tions.
NOTE Damaged windscreen This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the tion response.
camera and radar unit. IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
screen in front of one of the camera and reduced operation of driver support systems
High temperature that use the radar unit, the following also
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
At very high temperatures the camera and radar applies:
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have • Volvo recommends against repairing
the windscreen replaced – an authorised cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
Volvo workshop is recommended. area in front of the camera and radar unit.
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently. If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- Instead, the whole windscreen should be
ance for the driver support systems that use replaced.
the camera and radar unit. • Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
342
DRIVER SUPPORT
Maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
* Option/accessory. 343
DRIVER SUPPORT
52 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
344
DRIVER SUPPORT
to other vehicles, and in accordance with Large animals City Safety carries out three steps in the follow-
current traffic rules and regulations. In the event of a risk of a collision with a large ing order:
• The driver is advised to read all sections animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by 1. Collision warning
in the Owner's Manual that relate to City up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
2. Brake support
Safety to learn about factors such as its The brake function for large animals is primarily
limitations and what the driver should be 3. Auto Brake
intended to reduce the force of the impact at
aware of before using the system (see higher speeds and is most effective at speeds The following text explains what happens during
the list of links at the end of this article). above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at the three steps:
lower speed. 1 - Collision warning
Parameters for City Safety The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-
City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a
Overview
nent collision.
cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by
reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
function. vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same
direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety
If the speed difference is greater than the follow- can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large ani-
ing specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake mals that are crossing the road in front of the car.
function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates
the consequences of it. In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes-
trian, large animal, cyclist or vehicle (including
Vehicles vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by
speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph). means of a red flashing warning signal, an acous-
cyclists tic signal and a haptic warning in the form of a
Function overview52. brake pulse. At lower speeds or with hard braking
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by
up to 50 km/h (30 mph). Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk or acceleration there will be no haptic warning.
of collision The brake pulse frequency varies according to
Pedestrians the car's speed.
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
up to 45 km/h (28 mph). sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
52 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
345
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 2 - Brake support NOTE Search path in the top view of the centre display:
If the risk of collision has increased further after
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine • Settings My Car IntelliSafe
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated. stops when the Auto-brake function has stop-
ped the car, unless the driver has managed to Related information
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking depress the clutch pedal beforehand. • Setting the warning distance for City Safety
action if the system considers that the braking is (p. 347)
not sufficient to avoid a collision. • Detection of obstacles with City Safety
The driver can always interrupt a braking inter-
3 - Auto Brake vention by firmly depressing the accelerator (p. 348)
The automatic brake function is activated last. pedal. • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to prevented (p. 351)
take evasive action and the risk of collision is NOTE • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 350)
imminent then the automatic braking function is When City Safety brakes, the brake lights • Limitations of City Safety (p. 352)
deployed - this takes place irrespective of come on.
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then • Messages for City Safety (p. 355)
takes place with full brake force in order to • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 62)
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force When City Safety is activated and brakes the
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. vehicle, the driver display shows a text message
to the effect that the function is/has been active.
In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt
tensioner may also be activated. For more infor-
mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section. WARNING
City Safety must not be used as an excuse for
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may the driver to change his/her driving style. If
begin with light braking and then progress to full the driver relies solely on City Safety to do the
brake action. braking, there might be a risk of a collision
sooner or later.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object, the car remains stationary in
anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the Market limitation
car has been braked to avoid collision with a City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to Safety does not appear in the centre display's
match that of the vehicle in front. Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this
function.
346
DRIVER SUPPORT
Setting the warning distance for City warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a NOTE
Safety warning at a later stage.
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
City Safety is always activated but the driver can The Late warning distance should therefore only Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
select the warning distance for the function. be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driv- ing distance for collision warning in the City
ing. Safety function is set at the lowest level
NOTE "Late".
The City Safety function cannot be deacti- WARNING
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
vated. It is activated automatically when the
• No automatic system can guarantee functions are, however, still active.
engine/electric operation is started and 100 % correct function in all situations.
remains switched on until the engine/electric Therefore, never test City Safety by driv-
operation is switched off. ing at people, animals or vehicles - this
Related information
may cause severe damage and injury and • City Safety (p. 344)
The warning distance determines the sensitivity risk lives. • Detection of obstacles with City Safety
of the system and regulates the distance at (p. 348)
• City Safety warns the driver when there is
which the visual, acoustic and haptic warnings a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
shall be triggered. the driver’s reaction time. prevented (p. 351)
To select warning distance: • Even if the warning distance has been set • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 350)
1. to Early warnings could be perceived as • Limitations of City Safety (p. 352)
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
the centre display's top view.
there are large differences in speed or if
• Messages for City Safety (p. 355)
2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late, vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily. • Rear Collision Warning (p. 356)
Normal or Early to set the desired warning
distance.
• With the warning distance set at Early,
the warnings will come more in advance.
If the Early setting produces too many warnings, This may mean that the warnings come
which could be perceived as irritating in certain more frequently than at the warning dis-
situations, the Normal or Late warning distance tance Normal, but it is recommended
can be selected. since it can make City Safety more effec-
tive.
When warnings are perceived as being too fre-
quent or disturbing, the warning distance can be
reduced, which reduces the total number of
347
DRIVER SUPPORT
Detection of obstacles with City bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the Pedestrians
Safety bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
The obstructions that City Safety can detect are lower body plus a normal human pattern of move-
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians. ment.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
Vehicles not visible to the function's camera then the sys-
City Safety detects most vehicles that are either tem cannot detect a cyclist.
stationary or moving in the same direction as your
car, as well as vehicles described in the "City For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
Safety in cross traffic" section. he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a
vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear
lights must be working and clearly illuminated. WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes-
Cyclists but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations trians with clear body outlines.
and, for example, cannot see: For optimal performance, the system function
• partially obscured cyclists. that detects pedestrians must receive the clear-
est possible information about the body outline,
• cyclists if the background contrast of the
requiring the ability to identify the head, arms,
cyclist is poor – warning and brake inter-
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a nor-
ventions may then be late or not occur at
mal human pattern of movement.
all.
• cyclists wearing clothing that obscures In order that it shall be possible to detect a
the body outline. pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
• bicycles loaded with large objects. things as clothes, the background and the
The driver is always responsible that the vehi- weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- either be detected late or not at all, which may
Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a tance adapted to the speed.
cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline. mean that warnings and braking are late or omit-
ted.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body and
348
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the Large animals WARNING
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps. City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all large animals in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
WARNING
• partially obscured large animals.
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all sit- • larger animals seen from the front or from
uations and, for example, cannot see: behind.
• partially obscured pedestrians, people in • large animals that run or move quickly.
clothing that hides their body contour or • large animals if the background contrast
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.). of the animals is poor - warning and
• pedestrians if the background contrast of brake interventions may then be late or
the pedestrians is poor - warning and not occur at all.
Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as
brake interventions may then be late or large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with • small animals such as dogs and cats, for
not occur at all. clear body outline. example.
• pedestrians who are carrying larger Optimal performance requires that the system The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
objects. function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
horse) must receive the clearest possible infor- tance adapted to the speed.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- mation about the body outline, requiring the abil-
tance adapted to the speed. ity to identify the animal directly from the side in Related information
combination with what is a normal pattern of • City Safety (p. 344)
movement for the animal.
• Setting the warning distance for City Safety
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the (p. 347)
function's camera then the system cannot detect
• Detection of obstacles with City Safety
the animal. (p. 348)
City Safety can also detect large animals in the • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head- prevented (p. 351)
lamps.
• City Safety in cross traffic (p. 350)
• Limitations of City Safety (p. 352)
• Messages for City Safety (p. 355)
349
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety in cross traffic • the oncoming vehicle must have its head- • if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by some-
City Safety can help the driver when turning and lamps switched on. thing
crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at • if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
an intersection. WARNING switched off
• The "City Safety in crossing traffic" func- • if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre-
tion is supplementary driver support dictable manner, for example, abruptly
intended to improve driving safety – it changes lanes at a late stage.
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions. NOTE
• Warnings and brake interventions due to The function uses the car's camera unit,
a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle which has some general limitations, see the
often come very late. "Limitations for camera unit" section.
• Never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene.
NOTE
• City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver The function uses the car's radar unit, which
Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming cross- has some general limitations, see the section
ing vehicles. is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- "Limitations for radar unit".
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on priate speed, with an appropriate distance
a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first to other vehicles, and in accordance with Related information
enter the sector (1) in which City Safety can ana- current traffic rules and regulations.
lyse the situation. • City Safety (p. 344)
350
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) City Safety when evasive has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 332) manoeuvres are prevented steering manoeuvre.
City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive
automatically braking the car earlier when it is manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an
not possible to avoid a collision by only steering adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver
away. by automatically starting to brake at an earlier
stage.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta- WARNING
tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late • The ability of City Safety to be able to
stage. predict a specific situation is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
• City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
}}
351
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Limitations of City Safety The camera and radar unit's field of view
The City Safety function may have limitations in The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
The function uses the car's radar unit, which why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi-
certain situations.
has some general limitations, see the section cles in some situations cannot be detected, or
"Limitations for radar unit". Surroundings they are detected later than anticipated.
Low objects Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others
Related information Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro- and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late
• City Safety (p. 344) jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary or not at all.
• Setting the warning distance for City Safety lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon-
If a text message in the driver display indicates
(p. 347) net limit the function.
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City
• Detection of obstacles with City Safety Skidding Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large
(p. 348) On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City the car. This means that the functionality of City
• City Safety in cross traffic (p. 350)
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the Safety may be reduced.
• Limitations of City Safety (p. 352)
anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC53
However, an error message is not shown in all
• Messages for City Safety (p. 355) will give the best possible braking force with
situations where the windscreen sensors are
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) maintained stability.
obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 332) Oncoming light keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam-
The visual warning signal in the windscreen may era and radar unit clear.
be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun-
light, reflections, when sunglasses are being IMPORTANT
worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety
Heat
components must only be performed by a
In the event of high passenger compartment workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the recommended.
visual warning signal in the windscreen may be
temporarily disengaged.
352
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
353
DRIVER SUPPORT
354
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• City Safety (p. 344)
• Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 347)
• Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 348)
• City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 351)
• City Safety in cross traffic (p. 350)
• Limitations of City Safety (p. 352)
355
DRIVER SUPPORT
Rear Collision Warning • if the vehicle approaching from the rear has a BLIS*
The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). The BLIS54 function is designed to give a warn-
help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle ing of vehicles diagonally behind and to the side
approaching from behind. NOTE of your car so as to give assistance in heavy traf-
In certain markets, RCW does not give a fic on roads with several lanes in the same direc-
RCW is activated automatically each time the
warning with the direction indicators due to tion.
engine is started.
local traffic regulations - in such cases, this BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:
The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle part of the function is deactivated.
approaching from behind that a collision is immi- • vehicles in the car's blind spot
nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.
NOTE
• quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
If, at a vehicle speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), right lanes closest to the car.
the RCW function detects that the car is in dan- The warning with direction indicators for Rear
ger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt ten- Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
sioners may tension the front seatbelts and the ing distance for collision warning in the City
Whiplash Protection System safety system is Safety function is set at the lowest level
activated. "Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
Immediately before the collision, RCW may also
functions are, however, still active.
activate the foot brake in order to reduce the for-
ward acceleration of the car during the collision.
However, the foot brake is only activated if the Related information
car is stationary. The foot brake releases immedi- • City Safety (p. 344)
ately if the accelerator pedal is depressed. • Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 347)
Limitations Location of BLIS lamp55.
In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 62) Indicator lamp
helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. • Whiplash Protection System (p. 59)
This can be for example: The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
• if the vehicle approaching from the rear is
tion view.
detected too late
• if the vehicle approaching from the rear
changes lane at the last moment
356 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
Principle of BLIS • The BLIS function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
Zone in blind spot make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle. tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
The BLIS function is active at speeds • The responsibility for changing lanes
above 10 km/h (6 mph). safely and using good judgement always
The system is designed to react when: rests with the driver.
• your car is overtaken by other vehicles • BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
• another vehicle is quickly approaching your
always responsible for ensuring the car is
car.
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica- other vehicles, and in accordance with
tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side current traffic rules and regulations.
illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver acti-
vates the direction indicator on the same side as
the warning, the indicator lamp will change over
* Option/accessory. 357
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate BLIS* If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was Limitations of BLIS*
The BLIS56 function can be activated/deacti- switched off, it will continue to be deactivated The BLIS58 function may have limitations in cer-
vated. when the engine is next started and no indicator tain situations.
lights will then be illuminated.
Examples of limitations:
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 356) • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
• Limitations of BLIS* (p. 358)
• The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
• Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert* vated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is con-
(p. 363) nected to the car's electrical system.
• For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
WARNING
Location of BLIS lamp57.
• BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
Indicator lamp
• BLIS does not work when the car is
The function is activated/deactivated using reversing.
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view. Sensors
– Tap on the BLIS button in function view. The sensors for BLIS are located inside each
> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/ corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
grey indicator is shown in the button. also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) func-
tion.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the
function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator
lamps blinking once.
358 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert* Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 363) CTA60 is a driver support that supplements
• Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 361) BLIS61 and is designed to warn of traffic cross-
ing behind the car when it is reversing.
59 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
* Option/accessory. 359
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| If CTA has sensed that something is approaching WARNING Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic
from the side, this is also indicated with: Alert*
• The Cross Traffic Alert function is supple-
• an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the mentary driver support intended to facili- The CTA64 function can be deactivated.
left-hand or right-hand speaker according to tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
the direction from which the object On/Off
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
approaches. Press the Cross Traffic Alert
and road conditions.
button in the centre display's
• an illuminated icon in the PAS62 graphics on • The responsibility for reversing the car function view.
the screen. safely and using good judgement always
• an icon on the Park assist camera top view. rests with the driver.
• Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
• GREEN button indication - CTA is activated.
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the • GREY button indication - CTA is deactivated.
appropriate speed, with an appropriate CTA is activated automatically each time the
distance to other vehicles, and in accord- engine is started.
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions. Related information
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 359)
Related information • Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 361)
• Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* • Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 360) (p. 363)
Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS graphics on the
screen63. • Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert* • BLIS* (p. 356)
(p. 363)
• Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 361)
• BLIS* (p. 356)
• Park Assist* (p. 385)
360 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
361
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 359)
• Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 360)
• Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 363)
• BLIS* (p. 356)
• Limitations of BLIS* (p. 358)
362 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- • Managing messages in the driver display and
ing the button, located in the centre of the the centre display (p. 113)
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 356)
• Activate/deactivate BLIS* (p. 358)
• Limitations of BLIS* (p. 358)
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 359)
• Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 360)
* Option/accessory. 363
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate RSI
The Road Sign Information function is selectable
Examples of readable signs71. - the driver can select On or Off.
RSI provides information about such things as Press the Road Sign
current speed, when a motorway or road is star- Information button in the cen-
ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or tre display's function view.
when the direction of travel is one-way.
In the case where both a sign for motorway/dual
carriageway and a sign for the speed limit are
passed, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for
motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit • GREEN button indication - RSI is activated.
is shown directly with a line in the driver display's • GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated.
speed scale.
364 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Sign display with Road Sign If the driver enters a road End of all restrictions.
Information marked with a no-entry sign at
The Road Sign Information function (RSI72) reg- the roadside, the symbol for
isters and shows road signs in different ways this sign73 flashes on and off
depending on the sign and the situation. on the driver display as a warn-
ing.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation* End of motorway.
then information from the map is also used to
determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning when
driving towards a no-entry entrance if the Audio
Warning function is activated - see the heading The driver display symbol extinguishes after
"Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning" in 10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign speed related sign is passed.
Information".
Changed speed limit
Example73 of detected speed information.
Speed limit or end of motorway When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign" speed limit changes, a symbol with the corres-
When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at ponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with
symbol plus an indication in red on the speedom- the corresponding road sign in the driver's dis- Example of direct speed limit
eter. play. sign73.
* Option/accessory. 365
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| The driver display symbol extinguishes after Additional signs Some speed limits only apply
about 5 minutes and remains so until the next after a certain distance or at a
speed related sign is passed. certain time of day. The driver's
attention is drawn to this fact
Sensus Navigation by means of a symbol for an
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, additional sign below the speed
speed information is read from the navigation symbol. The additional symbol
unit in the following cases: in the driver display will show either “DIST” or
• On detection of signs that indirectly indicate “TIME”.
a speed limit, such as motorway, dual car- A symbol for additional sign in
riageway and city limit signs. the form of an empty frame
• If a previously detected speed sign is under the driver display's speed
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new symbol73 means that the RSI
sign has been detected. Examples of additional signs73. has detected an additional sign
Sometimes different speed limits are signed for with supplementary information
NOTE the same road - an additional sign then indicates for the current speed limit.
the circumstances under which the different
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for speed-
speeds apply. The road section may be particu- Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
larly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, If the warning sign73 for
related information.
for example. "School" or "Children at play"
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed is included in the satellite navi-
only if the windscreen wipers are in use. gator's map data74, the driver
display shows a sign of this
If the car has a trailer attached and you pass a type.
speed sign with the additional sign “trailer”, the
indicated speed will appear on the driver display. Related information
• Road Sign Information* (p. 364)
• Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 367)
73 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
74 Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*.
366 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Road Sign Information with Speed Activating/deactivating speed warnings
Information* (p. 368) Warning and Settings The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is acti-
• Limitations of Road Sign Information* The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for vated as follows:
(p. 369) RSI75 is selectable - the driver can select On or 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Off.
Road Sign Information in the centre
Speed Limit Warning alerts the driver when the display's top view.
applicable speed limit or set "speed limit" is 2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
exceeded. The warning is repeated once if the
> The function is activated and a speed limit
driver does not reduce speed.
selector appears.
The speed warning is given by
(see description for "speed limit selector "
the driver display symbol76
under following heading)
showing the applicable maxi-
mum permitted speed tempo-
rarily flashing when this speed
is exceeded.
A speed warning is always
given if the speed limit is
exceeded in connection with
speed camera information.
* Option/accessory. 367
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Adjust the limit for Speed Warning With the Audio Warning function activated, the Road Sign Information with Speed
The driver can select to receive a warning at a driver is also warned when driving towards one- Camera Information*
lower or higher speed than the signed speed. way traffic/no-entry entrance. A car equipped with RSI77 and Sensus
Select limit for speed warning as follows: Related information Navigation* can provide information on an
upcoming speed camera in the driver display.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe • Road Sign Information* (p. 364)
Road Sign Information in the centre • Sign display with Road Sign Information
display's top view. (p. 365)
2. Select Speed Limit Warning. • Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information* (p. 368)
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears. • Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 369)
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by press-
ing the up/down arrows on the screen.
Note that the function does not
give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment when
the driver display shows the
Speed camera warning in the driver display78.
speed camera symbol.
If the car exceeds a detected
speed limit, the driver can be
Acoustic warning On/Off warned when the car
It is also possible to receive an acoustic warning approaches a speed camera,
in connection with Speed Warning. provided that the navigation
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows: maps for the area in question
contain information on speed
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe cameras.
Road Sign Information in the centre For more information about Speed warnings in
display's top view. connection with speed cameras - see section
2. Select/deselect Audio Warning to activate/ "Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and
switch off the acoustic warning.
368 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Settings" and "Road Sign Information limita- Limitations of Road Sign NOTE
tions". Information*
The function uses the car's camera unit,
The Road Sign Information (RSI79) function may which has some general limitations, see the
NOTE have limitations in certain situations. "Limitations for camera unit" section.
Information about speed cameras in the navi-
Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as fol-
gation maps is not available for all markets/
lows: Related information
areas.
• Faded signs • Road Sign Information* (p. 364)
Related information • Signs positioned on bends • Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 367)
• Road Sign Information* (p. 364) • Rotated or damaged signs
• Sign display with Road Sign Information
• Sign display with Road Sign Information • Signs positioned high above the roadway (p. 365)
(p. 365)
• Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341)
• Road Sign Information with Speed Warning signs
and Settings (p. 367)
• signs completely or partly covered with frost,
• Limitations of Road Sign Information* snow and/or dirt
(p. 369) • digital road maps80 are out-of-date, inaccu-
rate or have no speed information81.
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types of
bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show incor-
rect speed information.
* Option/accessory. 369
DRIVER SUPPORT
370 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
On/Off
To change settings in DAC:
1. Press Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to acti-
vate/deactivate DAC.
371
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Driver Alert Control • Pilot Assist* (p. 315) Lane Keeping Aid
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA82) is
have limitations in certain situations. to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car
accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways
In some cases the system may issue a warning and similar major routes.
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam-
ple: Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the
• in strong side winds
steering wheel.
• on rutted road surfaces.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
WARNING
clearly visible side lines.
In some cases, driving behaviour is not affec-
ted despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using On narrow roads the function may be unavailable,
the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the in which case it goes into standby mode. The
driver not getting a warning from DAC. function becomes available again when the road
It is therefore important to always stop and is wide enough.
take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue,
whether the DAC function ha given a warning
or not.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
• Driver Alert Control (p. 370)
• Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
(p. 371)
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341)
372 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance
In order for LKA to function, the driver’s hands
must be on the steering wheel. The system moni-
tors this continuously.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, the driver display shows
this symbol and the following
message, to prompt the driver
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations83. to actively steer the car:
373
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym- Limitations • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
bol is shown again, combined with a warning In certain demanding conditions Lane assistance collision (p. 382)
sound and this message: may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In • Symbols and messages for lane assistance
such cases it is recommended to switch off this
• Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering (p. 376)
applied function.
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341)
If the driver then still does not follow the prompt Examples of such conditions are:
to start steering, LKA is set in standby mode - • road works
the function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again. • winter road conditions
• poor road surface
Lane assistance does not intervene • a very “sporty” driving style
• poor weather with reduced visibility
• sharp edges or lines other than the lane lines
• roads with unclear or non-existent line mark-
ings.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
374 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 375
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for lane Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane Indication of steering assistance/warning
assistance lines.
A number of symbols and messages regarding Unavailable
Lane assistance (LKA86) can be shown on the
driver display.
376
DRIVER SUPPORT
Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Lane Keeping Aid The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on
the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
Apply steering
Lane Keeping Aid LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
Standby until steering applied
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- Related information • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
ing the button, located in the centre of the • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 372) collision (p. 382)
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. • Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an (p. 375) ture (p. 380)
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 383)
* Option/accessory. 377
DRIVER SUPPORT
378 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Related information
• Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 380)
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 372)
379
DRIVER SUPPORT
380
DRIVER SUPPORT
• poor weather with reduced visibility is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
• roads with unclear or non-existent side mark-
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
ings
current traffic rules and regulations.
• sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
* Option/accessory. 381
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance upon risk of The function does not intervene with steering Activating/deactivating Steering
head-on collision assistance if the direction indicator is used. And if assistance in the event of a collision
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who the function detects that the driver is actively risk with oncoming
does not notice that the car is drifting into the driving the car, activation of the function will be The function can be selected - the driver can
oncoming lane. delayed. choose to have it On or Off.
After automatic engagement, the driver indicates Proceed as follows to switch it off:
that this has occurred via a text message: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
• Collision avoidance the centre display's top view.
assistance: Automatic intervention
2. Deselect Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
WARNING
• The "Steering assistance at risk of
oncoming collision" subfunction is sup- NOTE
plementary driver support intended to When the Collision Avoid. Assistance
improve driving safety – it cannot handle function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
all situations in all traffic, weather and switched off:
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its road conditions.
own lane. • Steering assistance at risk of lane depar-
• Steering assistance is only activated if ture
Oncoming vehicles there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
Your car intervene. collision
The function is active within the speed range • The function is not a substitute for the • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly driver's attention and judgement. The collision
visible lane markings/lines. driver is always responsible for ensuring Even though it is possible to deactivate the
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the function, it is advisable for the driver to always
If the car is about to leave its own lane while an
appropriate speed, with an appropriate have it activated since it improves driving
oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same
distance to other vehicles, and in accord- safety in most cases.
time, the function can help the driver to steer the
car back into its own lane. ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
382
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 383
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| without noticing that another vehicle is approach- NOTE Other demanding situations can include:
ing.
When the Collision Avoid. Assistance • road works
The function is active within the speed range function is deactivated, all subfunctions are • winter road conditions
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly switched off:
visible lane markings/lines. • narrow roads
• Steering assistance at risk of lane depar- • poor road surface
After automatic engagement, the driver indicates ture
• a very “sporty” driving style
that this has occurred via a text message: • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
• poor weather with reduced visibility.
• Collision avoidance
assistance: Automatic intervention • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end WARNING
collision
Activating/deactivating Steering • The "Steering assistance at risk of rear-
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
assistance upon risk of rear-end end collision" subfunction is supplemen-
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
collision tary driver support intended to improve
have it activated since it improves driving
The function can be selected - the driver can driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
safety in most cases.
choose to have it On or Off. tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
Proceed as follows to switch it off: Limitations for steering assistance • Steering assistance is only activated if
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in upon risk of rear-end collision there is a high risk of collision – you must
the centre display's top view. In certain situations the function may have limited therefore never wait for the function to
functionality and fail to intervene e.g.: intervene.
2. Deselect Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is then disengaged. • for small vehicles, such as motorcycles • The function is not a substitute for the
• if the majority of the car has steered into the driver's attention and judgement. The
adjacent lane driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
• on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-exis-
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
tent lane markings
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
• outside the speed range 60-140 km/h ance with current traffic rules and regula-
(37-87 mph). tions.
384
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Park Assist* approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta-
Park Assist Pilot assists the driver when cles behind is also active when the car is station-
The function uses the car's camera unit, ary.
manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the
which has some general limitations, see the
distance to obstacles through acoustic signals At a distance within 30 cm from an obstacle
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
combined with graphics on the centre display. behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant
and the active sensor's field closest to the car
NOTE symbol is filled.
The function uses the car's radar unit, which The volume of the parking assistance signal can
has some general limitations, see the section be adjusted while the signal is sounding by
"Limitations for radar unit". means of the [>II] knob on the centre console.
Adjustment can also be performed in the top
In addition to the camera and radar unit, the func- view's Settings menu option.
tion uses the car's rear-facing radar, which has
certain general imitations that a driver should be NOTE
aware of - see section "Limitations for BLIS" for • Acoustic warnings are only given for
more information. objects directly on the vehicle's route.
Related information Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 372)
The centre display shows an overview of the rela-
• Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid tionship between the car and detected obstacles.
(p. 375)
The highlighted sector indicates the location of
• Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar- the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a
ture (p. 380) highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance
• Steering assistance upon risk of head-on between the car and detected obstacle.
collision (p. 382)
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 332) audio system is muted automatically.
• Limitations of BLIS* (p. 358) The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
}}
* Option/accessory. 385
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
386
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 387
DRIVER SUPPORT
87 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
388 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 385)
• Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 387)
• Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 390)
* Option/accessory. 389
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Unavailable Service required
390 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 391
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 360° view* If the car is also equipped with Park Assist Forwards
System* then distance to detected obstacles is
illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually, see article "Starting the Park assist
camera".
Backwards
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approxi- The forwards parking camera88 is located in the grille.
mate coverage area.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road
The function activates all parking cameras, with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there
whereupon the four sides of the car are shown are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to
simultaneously in the centre display, which helps 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front
the driver to observe what is around the car when camera is switched off.
manoeuvring at slow speeds.
The backwards-facing camera88 is fitted above the reg- If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and
From the 360° view, each camera view can be istration plate. the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within
activated separately: The backward-facing camera shows a wide area 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has
• Press the screen for the desired “field of behind the car. For certain models, part of the been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
vision” of the camera, e.g. in front of/above bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in
the front camera. some cases.
The cameras that are active are indicated at the Objects shown in the centre display may appear
top of the screen in the selected view. slightly tilted — this is normal.
392 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The sides Park assist lines and fields for the the driver the path the car will take - also when
park assist camera* the car is turning.
The Park assist cameras indicate the position of These park assist lines include the car's most
the car in relation to its surroundings by display- protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
ing lines on the screen. corners.
Park assist lines
NOTE
• When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the park
assist lines on the display show the route
the car will take – not the trailer.
• Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 395) Park assist lines show the intended route for the
car's external dimensions with the current steer-
• Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 396)
ing wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,
• Park Assist* (p. 385) reversing into tight spaces and when connecting
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400) a trailer.
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 359) The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and respond
directly to steering wheel movements, showing
* Option/accessory. 393
DRIVER SUPPORT
394 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Sensor field from Parking assistance* The fields for the front and reversing sensors Starting the Park assist camera*
If the car is equipped with Parking assistance change colour as the distance to the obstacle The park assist camera starts automatically
then the distance is shown in the 360° view with decreases — from yellow through orange to red. when reverse gear is engaged or manually with
coloured fields for each sensor that registers an Colours of front and Distance (metres) one of the centre display's function buttons.
obstacle.
reversing fields
Camera view when reversing
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
Yellow 0,6–1,5 When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows
the 360° view if it or any of the side views was
Orange 0,4–0,6 the last used camera view, otherwise the rear
Red 0–0,4 view is shown.
Sensor field to the sides Camera view for manual camera start
The side fields are only shown in orange. Start the parking camera with
this button in the centre dis-
Colour of side fields Distance (metres) play's function view.
Orange 0–0.3
Related information
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car • Park assist camera* (p. 391) The screen initially shows the last used camera
symbol91. • Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 395) view. However, after each engine start, the previ-
ously shown side view is replaced by the 360°
• Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 396) view and the previously shown zoomed rear view
is replaced by the rear view.
* Option/accessory. 395
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h Limitations for park assist camera* undetected until the car is very close to the
(9 mph) and not reactivated. The park assist camera cannot detect everything obstacle.
in all situations and may therefore have limited
Related information
functionality.
• Park assist camera* (p. 391)
• Park assist lines and fields for the park assist A driver should be aware about the following
camera* (p. 393) examples of the park assist camera's limitations:
• Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 396)
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
The symbol indicates that vision.
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obsta- In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in
cles. the gaps between the individual cameras.
Defective camera
NOTE If a camera sector is black and
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on contains this symbol then it
the rear of the car could obscure the cam- means that the camera is out
era's view. of order. The following illustra-
tion shows an example.
Blind sectors
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only
looks like a relatively small part of the image is
obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that
is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go
396 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Maintenance
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm
water and car shampoo - be careful not to
scratch the lenses.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic-
ularly important in poor light.
Related information
The car's left-hand camera is out of order. • Park assist camera* (p. 391)
Black camera sector • Park assist lines and fields for the park assist
A black camera sector is also shown in the fol- camera* (p. 393)
lowing instances, but then without the symbol for • Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 395)
defective camera:
• Symbols and messages for Park assist cam-
• open door era* (p. 398)
• open tailgate
• folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in
reduced image quality.
* Option/accessory. 397
DRIVER SUPPORT
398 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 385)
• Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 387)
• Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 388)
* Option/accessory. 399
DRIVER SUPPORT
400 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Perpendicular parking • Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407) Parking with Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP93) helps the driver park
via three steps. The function can also help the
driver to leave a parking space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
• keep a close watch around the car
• follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
* Option/accessory. 401
DRIVER SUPPORT
The distance between the car and parking 1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft) parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for
while PAP is searching for a parking space. perpendicular parking.
2. Tap on the Park In button in function view.
Parking > PAP searches for a parking space and
PAP parks the car using the following steps: checks whether it is big enough.
1. A parking space is identified and measured. 3. Be prepared to stop the car when the
2. The car is reversed into the space. graphic and message on the centre display
state that a suitable parking space has been
3. The car is positioned into the space - the found.
system may then request that the driver Principle for parallel parking.
> A pop-up window is shown.
changes gear.
Finding and measuring parking spaces 4. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular
The function can be activated parking and select reverse gear.
in the centre display's function
view. NOTE
It can also be accessed from PAP searches the area for parking, displays
the camera views. instructions and guides the car in on its pas-
senger side. But if required the car can also
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
• Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches
Principle for perpendicular parking.
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
402
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reversing in to the parking space Perform the following to reverse the car into the Positioning the car in the parking space
parking space:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
NOTE
Parallel. Parallel.
• Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is acti-
vated.
• Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
• To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
Perpendicular. Perpendicular.
Proceed as follows:
1. Move the gear selector into the D position,
wait until the steering wheel has been turned
and drive slowly forward
}}
403
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed The Park Out function is acti- Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
by the graphic and message on the centre vated in the centre display's The Park Assist Pilot (PAP94) function cannot
display. function view. detect everything in all situations and may there-
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back- fore have limited functionality.
wards.
4. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
WARNING
by the graphic and message on the centre Proceed as follows: • The PAP function is supplementary driver
display. 1. Tap on the Park Out button in function view. support intended to facilitate driving – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
The function is deactivated automatically and the 2. Use the direction indicator to select the weather and road conditions.
graphics and message show that parking is com- direction in which the car should leave the
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct parking space. • Be particularly aware of people and ani-
the car’s position. Only the driver can determine mals near the car.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
whether the car is properly parked.
by the graphic and message on the centre
• Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic dur-
display - follow the instructions in the same ing the parking manoeuvre.
IMPORTANT way as for the parking procedure.
The warning distance is shorter when the • Objects situated higher than the sensor
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when detection area are not included when cal-
sensors are used by PAP compared with
the function is completed - the driver may then culating the parking manoeuvre, which
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi- could cause PAP to swing into the park-
mum steering angle in order to leave the parking ing space too early – such parking
Leaving a parking space space. spaces should be avoided for this reason.
If PAP considers that the driver can leave the • PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
NOTE parking space without any extra manoeuvring attention and judgement. The driver is
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out then the function will be stopped, even if the always responsible for ensuring the car is
function must only be used for a parallel- driver may consider that the car is still in the driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
parked car - it does not work for a perpendic- parking space. ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
ular-parked car. other vehicles, and in accordance with
Related information current traffic rules and regulations.
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
• Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
• Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407)
404 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
A driver should be aware about the following NOTE • The driver is responsible for determining
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations: whether the space selected by PAP is suita-
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will ble for parking.
Parking is discontinued reduce their function and may prevent meas-
A parking sequence will be discontinued: urement. • Use approved tyres95 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
• if the driver moves the steering wheel park the car.
• if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an • Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
(4 mph) measure the parking space incorrectly.
aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function.
• if the driver presses Cancel in the centre The driver must therefore be prepared to inter- • Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
display rupt a parking step. wheel are fitted.
• when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
There are also a few details to bear in mind while • Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a from the car.
parking, e.g.:
wheel loses grip on a slippery road.
• PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles • Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed
Where applicable, a message in the centre dis- or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is
play states the reason for a parking sequence already parked nearby - if they are inap-
protruding more than other parked cars.
being discontinued. propriately parked, your own car's tyres and
wheel rims may be damaged by contact with
the kerb. IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• PAP is designed for parking on straight Changing to another approved wheel rim
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
to find parking spaces - one reason for this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the tyre circumference, which means that the
may be the fact that there is interference with parking space when PAP measures the PAP system's parameters may then need to
the sensors from external sound sources space. be updated. Consult a workshop - an author-
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
as those with which the system works. • Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required for
Examples of such sources include horns, wet manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
405
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Maintenance
Related information
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
• Parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 401)
• Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407)
96 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
406 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
• Parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 401)
• Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
* Option/accessory. 407
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock* Bypass of the alcohol lock* Before starting the engine with the
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the In the event of an emergency situation or the alcohol lock
car from being driven by individuals under the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car. then ready for use when the car is opened.
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence of For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep- To bear in mind
alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in arate instructions for that specific lock. In order to obtain correct function and as accu-
accordance with each market's limit value in Activating the bypass function (Bypass) rate a measurement result as possible:
force for driving legally. • Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
NOTE before the breath test.
The car has an interface for the electrical con-
nection of the different makes and models of All bypass activation is logged and saved in • Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco-
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter- the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit. hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor-
face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives It is not possible to undo a bypass. rect measurement result.
the option of an integrated function including
messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's NOTE
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
main display. For information about a specific After a completed period of driving, the
instead?, is shown in the screen:
alcohol lock, please refer to its owner's manual. engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
– Select Bypass by pressing once on the O without a new breath test.
WARNING button on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not Related information
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is > The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the
car can be started. • Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 410)
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely. The number of bypasses possible before service • Starting the car (p. 412)
is required is selected during alcohol lock instal-
lation.
Related information
• Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 410)
• Starting the car (p. 412)
410 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory. 411
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| NOTE Starting the car The remote control key is not physically used
The car is started using the start knob in the tun- when starting the car since it is equipped with
To reach level I or II without starting the support for keyless starting (Passive start).
nel console when the remote control key is in
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the passenger compartment. To start the car:
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions are to 1. The remote control key must be inside the
be selected. car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
• Ignition position I - Turn the start knob passenger compartment. With keyless lock-
clockwise and release it. The control auto- ing/unlocking of the car*, the key can be
matically returns to its starting position. anywhere in the car.
• Ignition position II - Turn the start knob 2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For
clockwise and hold it in position for cars with automatic gear changing, make
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob, sure that gear position P or N is selected.
which automatically returns to its starting For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure
position. that the gear lever is in neutral position or
• Back to ignition position 0 - To return to that the clutch pedal is depressed.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
ignition position 0 from position I and II - 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
Turn the start knob clockwise and release. The control automatically returns to its star-
The control automatically returns to its star-
WARNING
ting position.
ting position. Before starting:
1 If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.
412 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out from
the car when leaving the car and make sure
the car's electrical system is in ignition posi-
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. tion 0 - especially if there are children in the
car.
If the message Car key not found is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the remote
control key on the backup reader in the cup NOTE
holder. Then try to start again.
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
NOTE than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the Start knob in the tunnel console.
When the remote control key is placed in the emissions system can reach normal operating
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, To switch off the car:
temperature as quickly as possible, which
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. minimises exhaust emissions and protects the – Turn the start knob clockwise and release it -
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) environment. the car is switched off. The control automati-
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close cally returns to its starting position.
to each other in the cup holder can cause
Related information If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
interference with each other.
• Ignition positions (p. 411) gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
• Switching off the car (p. 413) – Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the
IMPORTANT car is switched off.
• Remote control key (p. 238)
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further • Replacing the battery in the remote control Related information
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat-
key (p. 260) • Starting the car (p. 412)
tery is allowed to recover. • Ignition positions (p. 411)
413
STARTING AND DRIVING
Steering lock Using jump starting with another 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the battery to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise If the starter battery is discharged then the car
can be perceived when the steering lock locks can be started with current from another battery. IMPORTANT
or unlocks. Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
Activating the steering lock short circuits with other components in the
The steering lock is activated when the car is engine compartment.
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the 5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover
steering lock will lock automatically after a while. (2).
Deactivating the steering lock 6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
The steering lock is deactivated when the car is onto the car's positive jump-starting point
unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, (2).
the steering lock will deactivate if the remote 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
control key is inside the passenger compartment to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
and the car is started by turning the start knob Attachment points for the jump leads. 8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp
clockwise to unlock the steering lock.
When jump starting the car, the following steps onto the car's negative jump-starting point
Related information are recommended to avoid short circuits or other (4).
• Starting the car (p. 412) damage: 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
• Switching off the car (p. 413) 1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition securely so that there are no sparks during
position 0. the starting attempt.
• Steering wheel (p. 135)
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
12 V. it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
414
STARTING AND DRIVING
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- WARNING Gearbox
charged battery. The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
(power transmission) between engine and drive
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
IMPORTANT wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change
be formed if a jump lead is connected
Do not touch the connections between cable the gear ratio depending on speed and power
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
and car during the starting attempt. There is a requirements.
the battery to explode.
risk of sparks forming.
• Do not connect the jump leads to any There are two main types of gearbox, manual and
fuel system component or any moving automatic.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - part. Be careful of hot engine parts. The manual gearbox has six gears. The automatic
first the black and then the red.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid, which gearbox can have either eight gears or six gears
Make sure that none of the black jump lead's can cause serious burns. depending on which engine the car is equipped
clamps comes into contact with the car's with. The number of gear changes means that
• If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
positive jump-starting point/donor battery's eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large the engine's torque and power range can be
positive terminal or the clamp connected to quantities of water. If acid splashes into used effectively.
the red jump lead. the eyes - seek medical attention imme- It is also possible to select gears manually with
diately. the automatic gearbox. The driver display respec-
• Never smoke near the battery. tively shows which gear or gear position is cur-
rently in use.
Related information IMPORTANT
• Starter battery (p. 557)
To prevent damage to any drive system com-
• Ignition positions (p. 411)
ponents, the working temperature of the
• Starting the car (p. 412) gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over-
• Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 541) heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the
driver display and a text message is shown -
follow the recommendation given.
415
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Symbol Specification Gear positions for automatic To be able to move the gear selector from the
gearbox park position, the brake pedal must be depressed
Information or error message for With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses and the ignition position must be II.
gearbox. Follow the recommenda- the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P
tion given. also has a manual gearshift mode. position is engaged. Apply the parking brake first
when the car is parked.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow Gear positions in the driver display
the recommendation given. WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
Reduced performance/Acceler- automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
ation performance reduced. ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
In the event of a temporary power- tions.
train fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced NOTE
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain. The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
Related information
• Gear positions for automatic gearbox The driver display shows the gear selector's posi- Reverse position - R
(p. 416) tion: Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta-
• Manual gearbox (p. 418) tionary when reverse position is selected.
P, R, N, D or M.
• Gear shift indicator* (p. 418) Neutral position - N
In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is No gear is engaged and the engine can be
also shown. started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta-
Gear positions tionary with the gear selector in N position.
416 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
2 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on the car's equipment.
* Option/accessory. 417
STARTING AND DRIVING
Manual gearbox • Follow the gearing pattern on the gear lever Gear shift indicator*
With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suit- and start from neutral position, N, before The gear shift indicator in the driver display
able gear manually, according to speed and moving it to the R position. shows the current gear during manual gearshift-
power requirements at the time. • Engage reverse gear only when the car is ing and when it is appropriate to engage the
stationary. next gear for optimum fuel economy.
Changing gear
During parking For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is
important to drive in the right gear and to change
WARNING gear in good time.
Related information
• Gearbox (p. 415)
• Gear shift indicator* (p. 418)
418 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory. 419
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear selector inhibitor From park position - P moved to the N position so that the car can be
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental To be able to move the gear selector from the P moved.
changing between different gear positions in an position, the brake pedal must be depressed and Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in
automatic gearbox. the ignition position must be II. front of the gear selector. Locate the hole
From neutral position - N with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of
There are two different types of gear selector
If the gear selector is in the N position and the the compartment.
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds Press a small screwdriver into the hole and
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor (irrespective of whether the engine is running) hold.
then the gear selector is locked.
Move the gear selector to position N and
To be able to move the gear selector from the N release the button.
position to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the ignition position must 4. Put the rubber mat back in place.
be II.
Related information
Deactivate automatic gear selector • Gear positions for automatic gearbox
inhibitor (p. 416)
• Ignition positions (p. 411)
Automatic gear selector inhibitor If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a dis-
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special charged battery, the gear selector must be
safety systems.
420
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory. 421
STARTING AND DRIVING
422 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
With automatic gearbox engages, which prevents the car from rolling Symbols in the driver display
backwards.
• Stop the car with the foot brake and then With 12-inch driver display*
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the • When the Auto hold function is activated, • The text READY is shown in the tachometer
engine stops automatically. auto-start is delayed until the accelerator when the function is available.
pedal is depressed.
With manual gearbox • A pointer in the tachometer points to
• When the Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist READY when the function is active and the
• Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral posi-
function are activated, the engine will autos-
tion and release the clutch pedal - the engine is auto-stopped.
tart when the accelerator pedal is depressed,
engine stops automatically. • The text READY is greyed out when the
or by pressing the button on the left function is not available.
In drive mode Eco or Comfort3, the engine may keypad of the steering wheel.
auto-stop before the car is completely stationary. • No text is shown when the function is deacti-
• Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal vated.
With the Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist func- and depress the accelerator pedal - the
tion activated, the engine will autostop after engine auto-starts.
approximately three seconds.
• On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
See the section "Conditions for Start/Stop func- the brake pedal slightly so that the car
tion". begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
Autostart
With manual gearbox
The following is required for the engine to auto-
start: • With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal or depress the
With automatic gearbox accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
• Release the brake pedal - the engine will • On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
autostart and you can continue driving. On an the brake pedal slightly so that the car
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA) begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
* Option/accessory. 423
STARTING AND DRIVING
424 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
• The driver makes sweeping steering wheel With automatic gearbox: • High humidity in the passenger compartment
movements. forms misting on the windows.
• The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in
• The road is very steep. P position and the driver's door is open - a • The environment in the passenger compart-
• The bonnet is opened. normal start must take place. ment deviates from the set values.
• When driving at high altitudes when the With manual gearbox: • There is a temporarily high current take-off
engine has not reached operating tempera- or starter battery capacity drops below the
• The driver is unrestrained.
lowest permissible level.
ture.
• A gear is engaged without declutching.
• Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
• The ABS system has been activated.
• In the event of heavy braking (even without Involuntary stop with manual gearbox • The bonnet is opened.
the ABS system having been activated). If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed • The car starts to roll or increase speed
as follows: slightly if the car auto-stopped without being
• Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal 1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked completely stationary.
protection. in the seatbelt buckle. The following applies to automatic gearbox:
• The exhaust system's particulate filter is full4. 2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine • The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
starts automatically. the gear selector in D or N position.
• A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s
electrical system. 3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in • The gear selector is moved from D to posi-
neutral position. A message is shown in the tion R or ±.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
driver display - follow the recommendation
• The gearbox is not at normal operating tem- given. • The driver's door is opened with the gear
perature. selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
The engine auto-starts without the text message indicate that the ignition is on.
• The gear selector is in ± position.
brake pedal having been released
The engine does not auto-start In the following cases, the engine auto-starts WARNING
In the following cases the engine does not auto- even if the driver does not take his/her foot off Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
start after having auto-stopped: the brake pedal: auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally
before lifting up the bonnet.
425
STARTING AND DRIVING
426 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
For example: The driver display has an ECO gauge that facili-
tates fuel-efficient driving.
• Cannot be selected because gear is in
manual More information on this drive mode is found in
the section "Drive mode ECO".
• Cannot be selected due to low battery
DYNAMIC
• Cannot be selected due to low
temperature • Dynamic mode means that the car has sport-
ier characteristics and faster response to
• Cannot be selected due to limitations accelerating.
• Cannot be selected because speed is The gear changes become faster and more dis-
too high. tinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with
greater traction.
Selectable drive modes
COMFORT Steering response is faster and shock absorption
is harder6 which means that the body follows the
• This is the car's normal mode.
roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering.
When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and
the Start/Stop function is activated. These set- Start/Stop function is deactivated.
tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the INDIVIDUAL
steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and • Adapting a drive mode according to individ-
body's movement is smooth. ual preferences.
This drive mode is the certification mode for car- Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust Settings view7 for individual drive mode.
bon dioxide emissions. the settings according to the desired driving cha-
racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi- 1. Press Settings in the top view.
ECO
vidual driver profile. 2.
• Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and
environmentally-conscious driving with the An individual drive mode is only available if it is select Individual Drive Mode.
Eco mode. first activated in the centre display.
The drive mode means, for example, that the
Start/Stop function is activated and the output of
certain climate settings is reduced.
6 Applies to Four-C.
7 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on car model or updated software. }}
427
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| 3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from: Drive mode ECO display shows ECO when the function is acti-
Eco, Comfort or Dynamic. Driving mode ECO mode optimises the car's vated.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for: driving characteristics for more fuel efficient and With drive mode control*
environmentally-conscious driving.
• Driver Display
• Steering force Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environ-
ment.
• Powertrain Characteristics
The following properties are adapted for Eco driv-
• Brake Characteristics
ing:
• Suspension Control
• Gearbox gearshift points8.
• ECO Climate
• Engine management and response from the
• Start/Stop. accelerator pedal.
Related information • The Eco Coast8 freewheel function is acti-
• Speed-dependent steering force (p. 278) vated and engine braking is deactivated
when the accelerator pedal is released at
• Level control* and shock absorption (p. 431) 1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h
• Start/Stop (p. 422) (40 and 87 mph). > A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
• Drive mode ECO (p. 428) • Some of the climate control system's set-
display.
• All-wheel drive* (p. 431) tings work at reduced power or are deacti- 2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
vated. desired drive mode is highlighted.
• Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 304) • The driver display shows information in an 3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally- on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
conscious and fuel-efficient driving.
428 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the centre display's function view Activating the freewheel function Deactivating and switching off the freewheel
A car without drive mode con- The function is activated when the accelerator function
trol has a function button for pedal is fully released, in combination with the In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti-
Driving mode ECO in the following parameters: vate or switch off the function in order to use
centre display's function view. engine braking. Examples of such situations may
• Drive mode Eco is activated.
be on steep downhill gradients or before an
• The gear selector is in D position. imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be
• Speed within the range of able to do it in the safest way possible.
– Press the button in order to activate the approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
function. Deactivate the freewheel function as follows:
• The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
> An indicator in the button illuminates
than approx. 6%. • Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
when the function is activated.
The driver display shows COASTING when the • Move the gear selector to manual position.
Free-wheel function Eco Coast8 freewheel function is being used. • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
The freewheel function Eco Coast means in prac- Limitations Switch off the freewheel function as follows:
tice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn The freewheel function is not available if:
that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel • Change drive mode*, or switch off the
for longer distances. When the driver releases • Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal Driving mode ECO in the function view.
the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically operating temperature. Even without the freewheel function, it is possible
disengaged from the engine whose speed is • The gear selector is moved from the D posi- to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn,
reduced to idling speed with reduced consump- tion and the manual position. reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel
tion. economy it is better to have the freewheel func-
• The speed is outside the range of
tion activated and be able to freewheel for longer
The function is best used where it is possible to approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
distances.
freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight • The road's downhill gradient is steeper than
downhill gradient or when there is a predictable approx. 6%. Cruise control Eco Cruise
speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a When using the cruise control in the Eco drive
lower speed limit. • Manual gear changing is performed with the
steering wheel paddles*. mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will
be lower compared to other drive modes, which
enables further fuel savings. This means that the
* Option/accessory. 429
STARTING AND DRIVING
• With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a • Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 304)
low value with the pointer in the green zone.
• With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 196)
heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
gauge shows a high value.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display.
how a reference driver would drive the car under
ECO climate control
the same driving conditions. This is indicated with
In the Eco drive mode, ECO climate control is
the short pointer on the gauge.
activated automatically in the passenger com-
partment in order to reduce energy consumption.
430 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory. 431
STARTING AND DRIVING
Brake functions Foot brake brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor-
The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed The foot brake is part of the brake system. mal.
or prevent the car from rolling. A short test of the ABS system is made automat-
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
ically after the car has been started when the
Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto-
is equipped with several automatic brake assist engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will
matic test of the system may be made at low
functions. These can assist the driver by not therefore be needed to produce the normal brak-
speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the
needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal ing effect.
brake pedal.
when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill Braking on wet roads
brake servo.
gradient. When driving for a prolonged period of time in
Depending on the car's equipment, the following heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may
WARNING
auto braking functions are available: be delayed slightly when next using the brakes.
The brake servo only works when the engine This may also be the case after a car wash. It is
• Automatic braking when stationary (Auto is running. then necessary to depress the brake pedal more
Hold) forcefully. You should therefore maintain a
• Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist) If the foot brake is used when the engine is greater distance to the vehicles in front.
• Auto braking after a collision switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
• City Safety car.
using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs,
enabling them to dry faster and protecting them
Related information In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic
• Foot brake (p. 432) load the brakes can be relieved by using engine situation when braking.
• Parking brake (p. 435) braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine braking
is most efficiently used if the same gear is used Braking on salted roads
• Hill start assist (p. 438)
downhill as up. When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may
• Automatic braking when stationary (p. 439) form on the brake discs and brake linings. This
Anti-lock braking system may extend braking distance. You should there-
• Auto braking after a collision (p. 434)
The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking fore maintain a greater safety distance to vehi-
System (ABS), which can prevent the wheels cles in front. In addition, make sure you do the
from locking while braking and allows maintained following:
steering control. Vibration may be felt in the
432
STARTING AND DRIVING
• Brake now and again to remove any layer of Symbols in the driver display Related information
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
Symbol Specification • Brake functions (p. 432)
put at risk by the braking.
• Brake assistance (p. 434)
• Gently depress the brake pedal after finish- Check the brake fluid level. If the
ing driving and before starting your next trip. level is low, fill with brake fluid and • Brake lights (p. 146)
check for the cause of the brake • Emergency brake lights (p. 434)
Maintenance fluid loss.
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in Constant glow for 2 seconds when
the Service and Warranty Booklet. the engine is started: Automatic
function check.
New and replaced brake linings and brake discs
do not provide optimal braking effect until they Constant glow for more than 2
have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres. seconds: Fault in the ABS system.
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by The car's normal brake system is
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom- still working, but without the ABS
mends only fitting brake linings that are approved function.
for your Volvo.
WARNING
IMPORTANT If both the warning lamps for brake fault and
The wear on the brake system's components ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault
must be checked regularly. has occurred in the brake system.
Contact a workshop for information about the • If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
nearest workshop and have the brake
the inspection - an authorised Volvo work-
system checked - an authorised Volvo
shop is recommended.
workshop is recommended.
• If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid
must be investigated.
433
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
• Brake functions (p. 432)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 62)
• Airbags (p. 65)
434
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory. 435
STARTING AND DRIVING
Using the parking brake Symbol in the driver display Releasing the parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from Symbol Specification
rolling from stationary.
The symbol is illuminated when the
Applying the parking brake parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. Read the mes-
sage on the driver display.
Automatic application
The parking brake is applied automatically:
• if the Auto hold function (automatic braking
when stationary) is activated and the car has
been stationary for approx. 5 minutes. Releasing manually
• when gear position P is selected on a steep 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
hill9. 2. Press the control down.
1. Pull the control upward. • when the car is switched off and the "Auto- > The parking brake releases and the sym-
matic activation of parking brake" is acti- bol in the driver display extinguishes.
> The symbol in the driver display illumi-
vated10.
nates when the parking brake is applied.
Emergency brake
2. Check that the car is stationary.
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
applied when the car is in motion by pulling and
holding up the control. Braking stops when the
control is released.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.
436
STARTING AND DRIVING
Releasing automatically • Turn the wheels away from the kerb. In the event of a fault in the parking
1. Put the seatbelt on. If the car is parked facing downhill: brake
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not
• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
possible to release or apply the parking brake
3. Start the car. Heavy load uphill after several attempts.
4. With automatic gearbox: A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
to roll backward when the parking brake is An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving
Select gear position D or R and depress the released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid with the parking brake applied.
accelerator pedal. this by pulling the control upwards while driving If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
With manual gearbox: the car away. Release the control when the is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if
engine achieves traction.
Engage a suitable gear, release the clutch
and depress the accelerator pedal. Settings for parking brake
> The parking brake releases and the sym- Automatic activation of the parking brake is
bol in the driver display extinguishes. selected via the centre display.
Automatic activation when the car is switched off:
NOTE
1. Press Settings in the top view.
When the car is first started, the parking
brake can be released automatically without 2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
the seatbelt fastened. Suspension and deselect/select the func-
tion Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Parking on a hill
Related information
WARNING • Parking brake (p. 435)
}}
437
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| parking on a hill11 and the gear selector must be Message examples: Hill start assist
in position P, or engage first gear if the car has a
• Parking brake Service required Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents
manual gearbox. the car from rolling backwards when starting on
• Parking brake System overheated
an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre-
Low battery voltage • Parking brake Not released vents the car from rolling forwards.
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied. Con- • Parking brake Cannot hold car
The function means that the pedal pressure in
nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too • Parking brake Temporarily unavailable the brake system remains for several seconds
low. while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
Related information to accelerator pedal.
Replacing the brake linings • Brake functions (p. 432)
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a The temporary braking effect releases after sev-
• Using the parking brake (p. 436)
eral seconds or when the driver accelerates.
workshop due to the design of the electrically-
operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo • Parking brake (p. 435)
Hill start assist is available even if the function for
workshop is recommended. • Using jump starting with another battery automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is
(p. 414) deactivated.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification Related information
• Brake functions (p. 432)
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. See the mes- • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 439)
sage in the driver display.
438
STARTING AND DRIVING
Automatic braking when stationary Switch for automatic brake Symbols in the driver display
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) Symbol Specification
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when the The symbol is illuminated when the
car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction. function uses the foot brake to
keep the car stationary.
Function
When the car has stopped, the brakes are acti- The symbol is illuminated when the
vated automatically. The function can use either function uses the parking brake to
foot brake or parking brake to hold the car sta- keep the car stationary.
tionary and it works on all gradients. When the
accelerator pedal is depressed again, the brakes
are released. Related information
• Brake functions (p. 432)
When braking to a stop on a downhill or uphill An indicator in the button illuminates when the function
gradient - depress the brake pedal a bit harder is activated. • Hill start assist (p. 438)
before releasing to ensure that the car does not Activate or deactivate Auto hold with the switch
roll at all. in the tunnel console. The function remains deac-
When stationary or when is the car is switched tivated until it is reactivated.
off, the parking brake is applied after approx. 5 If the function is active and holds the
minutes. car with the foot brake (A-symbol illu-
minated) then the brake pedal must be
Automatic deactivation
depressed at the same time as the
The function is deactivated automatically:
button is depressed in order to deactivate.
• when the driver's door is open and the driv-
When the function is deactivated, hill start assist
er's seatbelt is unfastened.
(HSA) remains active to prevent the car from roll-
ing backwards when starting on an uphill gradi-
ent.
439
STARTING AND DRIVING
440
STARTING AND DRIVING
Transmission warm Reduce speed to Related information Overloading the starter battery
lower temperature or Transmission hot • Topping up coolant (p. 545) The electrical functions in the car load the starter
Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
• Driving with a trailer (p. 454) battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni-
recommendation given, reduce speed or stop tion position II when the car is switched off.
the car in a safe way and allow the engine to • Preparations for a long trip (p. 442)
Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less
run at idling speed for several minutes to power.
enable the gearbox to cool down.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
• If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
be switched off temporarily.
use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you Examples of such functions are:
stop after a hard drive.
• ventilation fan
NOTE • headlamps
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to • windscreen wiper
operate for a time after the engine has been • audio system (high volume).
switched off. If the starter battery voltage is low, the message
12 V Battery Low charge, will soon enter
Symbols in the driver display power save mode is shown in the driver display.
The energy-saving function then shuts down cer-
Symbol Specification
tain functions or reduces certain functions such
High engine temperature. Follow as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
the recommendation given. – In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
Low level, coolant. Follow the rec- more effective during driving than running
ommendation given. the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Related information
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled. • Ignition positions (p. 411)
Follow the recommendation given. • Starter battery (p. 557)
441
STARTING AND DRIVING
Preparations for a long trip • Settings for car modem* (p. 494) Winter driving
Before a driving holiday or some other type of • Recommendations for loading (p. 227) For winter driving it is important to perform cer-
long journey, it is important to check the car's tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it
functions and equipment particularly carefully.
• Pilot Assist* (p. 315)
can be driven safely.
• Speed limiter* (p. 283)
Check that: Check the following in particular before the cold
• Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
season:
• the engine is working normally and that fuel Information* (p. 368)
consumption is normal • Driving with a trailer (p. 454) • The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol.
• there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid) This mixture protects the engine against
• Driving in water (p. 440) frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid
• brake force during braking is optimal • Alarm* (p. 265) health risks, different types of glycol must not
• all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level
• Level control* and shock absorption (p. 431) be mixed.
if the car is heavily laden
• Warning triangle (p. 529) • The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
• the tyres have sufficient tread depth and condensation.
pressure. Change to winter tyres when driv- • Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 518)
• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
ing to areas where there is a risk of snowy or • Spare wheel* (p. 526) lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
icy road surfaces. in cold weather and also reduce fuel con-
• starter battery charging is good sumption while the engine is cold. Read
• the wiper blades are in good condition more about suitable oils in the section
"Adverse driving conditions for engine oil".
• a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are
located in the car - legally required in certain
countries. IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
Related information driving or in hot weather.
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 599)
• The condition of the starter battery and
• Checking the tyre pressures (p. 512) charge level must be inspected. Cold
• Filling washer fluid (p. 556) weather places great demands on the starter
• Winter driving (p. 442)
• Economical driving (p. 450)
442 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
battery and its capacity is reduced by the • Drive modes* (p. 426) Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
cold.
• Foot brake (p. 432) and refuelling
• Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice
• All-wheel drive* (p. 431) The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler
forming in the washer fluid reservoir. system.
• Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 278)
Slippery driving conditions Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom- The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap to
mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is be opened.
a risk of snow or ice.
In the driver display, the arrow
next to the tank symbol indi-
NOTE cates which side of the car the
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement fuel filler flap is located.
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con- on the rear of the flap.
trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap
Related information with a gentle press.
• Topping up coolant (p. 545)
• Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 595)
• Starter battery (p. 557)
• Winter wheels (p. 527)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 556)
• Replacing a wiper blade (p. 555)
• Parking climate* (p. 208)
• Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 196)
}}
* Option/accessory. 443
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Refuelling at a petrol station 3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open-
ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps
before refuelling is started.
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
13 The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the
end of 2018 at the latest.
14 Only applies to a car with diesel engine.
444 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Filling vehicle gas* 4. Remove the nozzle by turning its handle a Button for gas operation*
Refuelling with vehicle gas (CNG - Compressed half turn in the opposite direction. A car with the Bi-Fuel engine alternative has a
Natural Gas) for cars with the Bi-Fuel engine 5. Refit the gas nipple's protective cover and button to change between gas operation (CNG
alternative. close the fuel filler flap. - Compressed Natural Gas) and petrol opera-
tion.
Filling Identifier for vehicle gas
The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand- Operation
ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the lat-
est.
This is the identifier that
applies for CNG in Europe.
Vehicle gas with this identifier
may be used in cars that can
be driven on Bi-Fuel.
* Option/accessory. 445
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| The car always starts with petrol even if gas oper- Handling of fuel IMPORTANT
ation is selected. When the engine has started Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec-
the system automatically changes to gas opera- Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect
tion - normally within a few seconds of a warm which are not recommended will invalidate
engine power and fuel consumption.
start. Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
When starting with a cold engine it will take WARNING engines.
longer before the car changes to gas operation in Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
order to ensure the lowest possible emissions. fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any NOTE
warning lamp
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
If the warning lamp in the button illuminates, water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi-
and/or repetitive acoustic signals can be heard, trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
cal attention. tion with fuel grade are factors that could
then the car needs servicing. Acknowledge the
warning by pressing the button, and visit the Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe- affect the car's performance.
thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
nearest workshop - an authorised Volvo work- highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
shop is recommended. or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten- Related information
tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed. • Petrol (p. 447)
Related information
• Filling vehicle gas* (p. 445) • Diesel (p. 448)
• Fuel gauge for vehicle gas* (p. 104) WARNING • Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni- elling (p. 443)
ted. • Economical driving (p. 450)
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
446 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
447
STARTING AND DRIVING
448
STARTING AND DRIVING
Empty tank and diesel engine Points to remember when filling with a Diesel particulate filter
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva- fuel can Diesel powered cars have a particle filter for
tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel effective emission control.
carry out a check. located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
Before starting the engine after the fuel tank has the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable the diesel particle filter during normal driving.
been filled with diesel - proceed as follows: cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid past the When these conditions have been met, regenera-
cover before filling can begin. tion starts to burn off the particles and empty the
1. The remote control key must be inside the
filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have
car.
Related information reached normal operating temperature. Regener-
2. Put the car in the ignition position II - turn • Diesel (p. 448) ation of the particulate filter is automatic and nor-
the start knob clockwise without pressing the mally takes 10-20 minutes.
brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for (p. 599)
NOTE
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting The following may arise during regeneration:
position.
• a smaller reduction of engine power may
3. Wait approx. one minute. be noticed temporarily
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake pedal • fuel consumption may increase temporar-
and turn the start knob clockwise again. ily
• a smell of burning may arise.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
shortage: engine then reaches normal operating tempera-
• Stop the car on as flat/level ground as ture more quickly.
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply. IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the fil-
ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
}}
* Option/accessory. 449
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| When driving short distances at low Economical driving • Remove unnecessary items from the car -
speeds in a diesel car Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv- the greater the load the higher the consump-
The capacity of the diesel emission control sys- ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your tion.
tem is affected by how the car is driven. It is driving style and speed to the prevailing condi- • Use engine braking to slow down, when it
important to drive varying distances at different tions. can take place without risk to other road
speeds to achieve optimal performance. users.
• For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold drive mode. • A roof load and space box increase wind
climates) frequently, where the engine does not resistance, leading to higher consumption -
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to • Use the Eco Coast17 freewheel function - remove the load carriers when not in use.
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction engine braking will cease and the car's
kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for • Avoid driving with open windows.
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu- longer distances.
WARNING
larly drive at higher speeds to allow the diesel • Drive in the highest gear18 possible, adapted
emission control system to regenerate. to the current traffic situation and road - Never switch off the engine while moving,
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel con- such as downhill, this deactivates important
• The car should be driven on A-roads at systems such as the power steering and
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at sumption. Use the gear shift indicator.
brake servo.
least 20 minutes between each refuel. • Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis-
tance to other vehicles and objects to mini-
Related information Related information
mise braking.
• Diesel (p. 448) • Drive mode ECO (p. 428)
• High speed results in increased fuel con-
• Approved tyre pressures (p. 605)
sumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed. • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 599)
• Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25)
tyre pressure for best results.
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption -
seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
450
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri-
cation with grease in order to prevent wear.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
}}
* Option/accessory. 451
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
1. Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ 2. Press and release the button - extension 3. Move the towbar to its end position, where it
retracting the towbar is located on the right- might not start if the button is pressed for is secured and locked in place - the indicator
hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An too long. lamp illuminates with a constant orange
indicator lamp in the button must illuminate > The towbar extends out and down in an glow.
with a constant orange glow for the exten- unlocked position - the indicator lamp > The towbar is ready for use.
sion function to be active. flashes orange.
WARNING
WARNING Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
Do not press the extend/retract button if a in the intended bracket.
trailer is attached to the towing bracket.
NOTE
NOTE Power save mode activates after a while and
The towbar must finish the extension proce- the indicator lamp goes out. The system is
dure before it can then be moved to locked reactivated by closing and opening the tail-
position. This procedure may take several gate. This applies when retracting or extend-
seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked ing the towing bracket.
position, wait a few seconds and try again.
If the car detects a connected trailer electri-
cally, the indicator lamp stops illuminating
with a constant glow.
452
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
• Towing bracket* (p. 451)
• Towing bracket specifications* (p. 453)
}}
* Option/accessory. 453
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Dimensions, mounting points (mm) Driving with a trailer to a lower gear when shifting manually and
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of adjust your speed.
A 1229 points that are important to think about regar- • Follow the regulations in force for the permit-
B 111.8 ding the towing bracket, the trailer and how the ted speeds and weights.
load is positioned in the trailer.
C 875
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The trailer up long, steep ascents.
D 437,5 total of the weight of the passengers and all • The maximum indicated trailer weight only
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay- applies to heights up to 1000 metres above
E See the image above
load by a corresponding weight. sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the
F 310.5 engine output and the vehicle's climbing abil-
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment
ity are reduced due to the reduced air den-
G Ball centre for towing a trailer.
sity, and the maximum trailer load must
• The car's towing bracket must be of an therefore be reduced. The weight of the car
Related information approved type. and trailer must be decreased by 10% for
• Towing bracket* (p. 451)
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part
weight on the towing bracket complies with thereof).
the specified maximum towball load. Towball • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
load is calculated as part of the car's payload. than 12%.
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
NOTE
mended pressure for a full load. For more
information on tyre pressure, see the section Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
"Approved tyre pressures". trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
• The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
when driving with a trailer.
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at Trailer connector
least 1000 km (620 miles). An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket
has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin
• The brakes are loaded much more than usual connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo.
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
454 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, 2. Select gear position D.
which is normal.
When the engine is switched off, the constant 3. Releasing the parking brake.
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be When driving in hilly terrain and hot 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
switched off automatically so as not to drain climates
the starter battery. Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk Related information
of overheating when towing a trailer. In the event • Towing bracket* (p. 451)
Trailer weights of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in • Trailer lamps (p. 456)
the driver display together with a message, see
Information about Volvo's permitted trailer
section "Overheating in the engine and drive sys-
• Towing capacity and towball load (p. 590)
weights is available in the article "Towing
capacity and towball load". tem". • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 457)
The following only applies to cars with automatic • Approved tyre pressures (p. 605)
WARNING gearbox. • Overheating in the engine and drive system
(p. 440)
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be related to load and engine speed.
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking. Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
NOTE always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights low engine speed.
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle Parking on a hill
regulations can further limit trailer weights 1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can 2. Activate the parking brake.
actually tow. 3. Select gear position P.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Level control* Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car
The car's system for level control endeavours to
with hitched trailer on a hill.
maintain a constant height regardless of load (up
to the maximum permissible weight). When the Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
* Option/accessory. 455
STARTING AND DRIVING
Trailer lamps Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check Switching off automatic checking
When connecting a trailer - check that all the therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear The automatic checking function can be switched
trailer lamps work before departure. fog lamp to travel safely. off in the centre display.
456 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Trailer Stability Assist* movements. If snaking is detected, the front When trailer stability assist is
The function of the trailer stability assist (TSA19) wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta- operating, the ESC symbol
is to stabilise cars with attached trailers in situa- bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often flashes in the driver display.
tions where they begin snaking. The function is enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
included in the stability system ESC20.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
Reasons for snaking trailer stability assist comes into action, the car/
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any trailer combination is braked with all wheels and
Related information
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been • Driving with a trailer (p. 454)
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combi- • Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 278)
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the nation is stable once again, the system stops
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back. regulating and the driver once again has full con-
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a trol of the car.
triggering factor, e.g.:
NOTE
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind. The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur-
ESC via the menu system in the centre dis-
face or in a pothole.
play.
• Sweeping steering wheel movements.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if the
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ driver uses severe steering wheel movements to
trailer combination difficult to control and there is try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa-
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the tion the system cannot determine whether it is
wrong lane or leave the carriageway. the trailer or the driver that is causing the snak-
ing.
Trailer Stability Assist function
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
* Option/accessory. 457
STARTING AND DRIVING
Towing eye
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is
screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover
on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or
rear.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towing bracket,
there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
21 In a Bi-Fuel car the towing eye is located behind the side hatch on the left-hand side of the cargo area.
458 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper. Towing 5. Move the gear selector to neutral position N
During towing, the car is towed by another vehi- and release the parking brake.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. cle by means of a towline. If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
The car's position and ground clearance deter- brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
mine whether it is possible. donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.
towing before the towing begins.
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too > The towing vehicle can now start towing.
steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is Preparations and towing 6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi-
inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you 1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers. cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen-
try to pull it up using the towing eye. 2. Secure the towline in the towing eye. tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery avoiding unnecessary jerking.
3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the
vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye. car. 7. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING IMPORTANT
NOTE
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind Note that the car must always be towed with
In ignition position II the steering lock is
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up the wheels rolling forward.
deactivated if the car has been unlocked. See
onto the flatbed platform.
section “Ignition position” for more informa- • Do not tow cars with automatic transmis-
tion. sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h
IMPORTANT (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
4. Set the car in ignition position II by turning km.
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out the start knob clockwise and holding the
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery start knob in position for approx. 4 seconds. WARNING
assistance. Then release the knob, which automatically
returns to its starting position. • Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
Related information To reach level II without starting the engine -
• Ignition position II must be active - in
• Towing (p. 459) do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch
ignition position I all airbags are deacti-
pedal for cars with manual gearbox, when
• Recovering the car (p. 460)
selecting the ignition position. vated.
• Always keep the remote control key in the
car when it is being towed.
}}
459
STARTING AND DRIVING
460 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
AUDIO AND MEDIA
462 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Certain apps are only available for use if the car Audio settings
is connected to the Internet. The audio system is preset for optimal sound
– Tap on an app in the app view to launch it. reproduction, but can be adapted according to
needs.
Related information
• Online car* (p. 490) The volume is normally adjusted with the volume
control below the centre display or with the right-
• Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps hand steering wheel keypad.
(p. 495)
• Changing settings for apps (p. 180) Setting for optimal sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing. This calibration takes into account
Microphones in the car's roof.
loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combi-
nation of car model and audio system. There is NOTE
also a dynamic calibration that takes into account Do not cover the car's microphones.
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Related information
Audio settings are described in the correspond- • Audio settings for media (p. 475)
ing section in the owner information. To access
the settings, open the top view and tap on
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 122)
* Option/accessory. 463
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Radio • Voice recognition control of radio and media Changing and searching radio
It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands (p. 123) stations
and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is • Media player (p. 469) The radio automatically compiles a station list of
online it is also possible to listen to Internet the radio stations within the area that are trans-
• Settings for radio (p. 468)
radio. mitting the strongest signals.
464 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, To choose among favourites within the frequency Searching for radio stations
Genres or Ensembles1. band, see the heading “Changing lists within the
frequency band” above. To choose from among
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
all favourites, see the heading “Radio Favourites”
Favourites — only plays back selected favourite below.
channels, see heading “Favourites” below.
Radio Favourites
Genres — only plays back channels broadcast- Radio Favourites shows saved
ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop favourites from all frequency
or classical. bands.
465
AUDIO AND MEDIA
466
AUDIO AND MEDIA
467
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Settings for radio bourhood. Playback of previous media source Alarm - interrupts the current media play-
Settings for the different radio bands. is resumed when the message is finished. back and sends alerts about major accidents
The Local Interruptions function is a geo- and disasters. Playback of previous media
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be graphically restricted version of the Traffic source is resumed when the message is fin-
temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the Announcements function. The Traffic ished.
right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping Announcements function must be acti- Traffic Flash — receives information about
on Cancel in the centre display. vated at the same time. traffic disruptions.
Drag down the top view and select Settings • Alarm - interrupts the current media play- News Flash — receives news.
Media and the desired radio band. Activating/ back and sends alerts about major accidents
Transport Flash — receives information
deactivating functions. and disasters. Playback of previous media
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
source is resumed when the message is fin-
timetables.
AM/FM ished.
• Show Broadcast Information — shows Warning/Services — receives information
information on programme content, artists,
DAB about incidents of lower significance than
etc. • Sort Services - selection for how channels the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by
• Freeze Program Name — select to stop service number.
• Show Broadcast Information — select to
the programme service name from scrolling show radio text or selected types of radio
continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 sec- • DAB To DAB Handover - starts the func- text, e.g. artist.
tion for linking within DAB. If reception of a
onds.
radio channel is lost, another channel is
• Show Program Related Images — select
• News - interrupts the current media play- whether or not to show images for pro-
found automatically in another channel group grammes on the screen.
back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre- (ensemble).
vious media source is resumed when the
• DAB To FM Handover - starts the function Related information
news broadcast is finished.
for linking between DAB and FM. If reception • Radio (p. 464)
• Traffic Announcements - interrupts the of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
current media playback and broadcasts infor- frequency is searched for automatically. (p. 45)
mation about traffic disruptions. Playback of
previous media source is resumed when the • Select Announcements — select the • Digital radio (p. 467)
message is finished. types of messages to be received while DAB
is playing. Selected messages will interrupt
• Local Interruptions — interrupts the cur- the current media playback to play back the
rent media playback and broadcasts informa- message. Playback of previous media source
tion about traffic disruptions in the neigh- is resumed when the message is finished.
468
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory. 469
AUDIO AND MEDIA
470 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Changing media - select from previous sources Settings for video • video (p. 475)
in the app, in the app view, press on the desired With the video player in full screen mode, or by • Audio settings for media (p. 475)
app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand opening the top view and pressing Settings
keypad via the app menu .
• TV* (p. 476)
Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio
Language, Off and Subtitle Language. • Apple CarPlay* (p. 477)
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library. Playing back DivX® • Android Auto* (p. 479)
This DivX Certified® device must be registered in • Technical specifications for media (p. 481)
order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) films.
1. Press Settings in top view.
Shuffle - tap on the button to
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
shuffle the playback order.
registration code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and
to complete the registration.
Related information
Similar - tap on the button in • Using the application menu in the driver dis-
order to use Gracenote to play (p. 111)
search for similar music on the
USB device and to create a • Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 123)
playlist from it. The playlist can
contain a maximum of 50 • Connecting the car (p. 490)
songs. • Apps (p. 462)
Change device - tap on the • Searching media (p. 472)
button in order to switch • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 474)
between USB devices when
several are connected. • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 474)
• CD player* (p. 473)
• Radio (p. 464)
• Gracenote® (p. 472)
* Option/accessory. 471
AUDIO AND MEDIA
472
AUDIO AND MEDIA
• Using the keyboard in the centre display CD player* Media via Bluetooth®
(p. 49) The media player can play back CD discs with The car's media player is equipped with
• Online car* (p. 490) audio files. See technical specifications for sup- Bluetooth® and can wirelessly play audio files
ported formats. from external devices with Bluetooth®, such as
mobile phones and PDAs.
Related information
• Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 474)
• Media playback (p. 469)
• Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 123)
• Media player (p. 469)
• Ignition positions (p. 411)
• Technical specifications for media (p. 481)
Related information
• Media playback (p. 469)
• Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 123)
• Media player (p. 469)
• Technical specifications for media (p. 481)
* Option/accessory. 473
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® Media via USB port Connecting a device via USB port
Connect a Bluetooth® device with the car in An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
order to stream media and use as Internet con- player, can be connected to the audio system. player, can be connected to the audio system via
nection if it is available. one of the ports in the tunnel console. Allow the
Devices with rechargeable batteries are cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped
Many phones on the market now have wireless recharged when connected via USB and the igni- when the lid is closed.
Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are tion is in position I, II or the engine is running.
fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, The content of the external source can be loaded The phone must be connected to the USB port
see support.volvocars.com. more quickly if it only consists of compatible for- with white frame (when there are two USB ports)
mats. Video files can also be played back via the when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.
The procedure for connecting a media device is
the same as for connecting a phone. USB port.
Some MP3 players have their own file systems
Related information that are not supported by the audio system.
• Connect phone (p. 484)
• Media via Bluetooth® (p. 473) Related information
• Connecting a device via USB port (p. 474)
• Media playback (p. 469)
• Media playback (p. 469)
• Media player (p. 469)
• Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 123)
• Media player (p. 469)
• Ignition positions (p. 411)
USB ports in the tunnel console.
• video (p. 475)
• Apple CarPlay* (p. 477) Related information
• Technical specifications for media (p. 481) • Media playback (p. 469)
• Media via USB port (p. 474)
• Media player (p. 469)
• Technical specifications for media (p. 481)
474 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
video Audio settings for media With the Sound Experience app, there are
Videos on USB-connected devices can be Changing the audio settings for music and other more audio playback options, e.g. playback with
played back using the media player. playback. concert hall feel. The settings replace any
choices made for audio settings.
No picture is shown when the car starts to move, 1. Press Settings in top view.
but only the audio is played back. The picture is Related information
2. Tap on Sound and select settings:
shown again when the car is stationary. • Audio settings (p. 463)
See section "Technical specifications for media"
• Tone — personal settings for bass, treble, • Media player (p. 469)
equaliser, etc.
for supported video formats.
• Balance - balance between right/left
Related information loudspeakers and balance between front/
• Media playback (p. 469) rear loudspeakers.
• Media player (p. 469) • System Volumes – adjusts volume in
• Technical specifications for media (p. 481) the various systems of the car. For exam-
ple, Voice Control, Park Assist and
Phone Ringtone.
Sound experience*
* Option/accessory. 475
AUDIO AND MEDIA
476 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
With the video player in full screen mode, or by Apple CarPlay* When using map navigation via Apple CarPlay
opening the top view and pressing Settings Apple CarPlay gives you the option to listen to there is no guidance in the driver display or head-
Media TV, the following can be adjusted: music, make phone calls, get directions, send/ up display, but only in the centre display.
receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay The Apple CarPlay apps can be controlled via the
• Subtitle Language focused on your driving. Apple CarPlay works centre display, mobile phone or with the steering
• Audio Language with selected Apple devices. wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain
functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled
NOTE using Siri. A long press on the steering wheel
The system only supports TV broadcasts in button starts voice control using Siri and a
the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or short press activates the car's own voice control.
MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2 If Siri breaks off too early, hold the steering wheel
standard. The system does not support ana- button depressed.
logue broadcasts.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
Related information provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
• TV* (p. 476) conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
• Voice recognition control of radio and media responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
(p. 123) features/applications. When using Apple
• Media playback (p. 469) If the car is not already equipped with CarPlay, certain information from your car
Apple CarPlay then it is possible to install it after- (including its position) is transferred to your
• Navigating in the centre display's views iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
(p. 40) wards. Contact a Volvo dealer to install
Apple CarPlay. fully responsible for your and any others
• License agreement for audio and media person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
(p. 497) Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on Related information
Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. • Media player (p. 469)
Using apps that are not compatible with
Apple CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
• Connecting the car (p. 490)
connection between an iPhone and the car is • Using Apple CarPlay* (p. 478)
broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible
for the content in Apple CarPlay.
* Option/accessory. 477
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Using Apple CarPlay* 5. Tap on the desired app. 2. Continue to Communication Apple
To use Apple CarPlay, Siri voice control must be > The app starts. CarPlay.
activated in your phone. The phone must also 3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall
Starting Apple CarPlay
have an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the no longer start Apple CarPlay automatically
Apple CarPlay is started according to the follow-
mobile network. when the USB cable is connected.
ing after an iPhone has been connected.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the 4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
Connect an iPhone and start the USB port.
cases where there are two USB ports, the
Apple CarPlay one with the white frame around the port 5. Open the app iPod from the app view.
must be used.
NOTE iPod to Apple CarPlay
> If the setting for automatic start is
1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth selected - the subview with
is deactivated. A phone or media player con- Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible 2. Read the information in the pop-up message
nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore apps are shown. and then tap on OK.
not be available when Apple CarPlay is active. 2. If the subview with Apple CarPlay is not 3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
An alternative Internet source must be used opened, tap on Apple CarPlay in the app the USB port.
to connect to the Internet for the car's apps. view. > The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.
and compatible apps are shown.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the Related information
cases where there are two USB ports, the 3. Tap on the desired app. • Media player (p. 469)
one with the white frame around the port > The app starts.
• Media playback (p. 469)
must be used. Apple CarPlay runs in the background if another • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 474)
2. Read the information in the pop-up message app is started in the same subview. To show
and then tap on OK. Apple CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the • Settings for Apple CarPlay* (p. 479)
Apple CarPlay icon in the app view. • Connecting the car (p. 490)
3. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap Switch the connection between
on Accept to connect. Apple CarPlay and iPod
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened Apple CarPlay to iPod
and compatible apps are shown. 1. Press Settings in top view.
478 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory. 479
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| NOTE Starting Android Auto Android Auto runs in the background if another
app is started in the same subview. To show
When a phone is connected to Android Auto The first time an Android is connected
Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the
it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to 1. Connect the Android to the USB port. In the
Android Auto icon in the app view.
another media player. Bluetooth is active cases where there are two USB ports, the
while Android Auto is being used. one with the white frame around the port Related information
must be used. • Media player (p. 469)
When using map navigation via Android Auto 2. Read the information in the pop-up message • Media playback (p. 469)
there is no guidance in the driver display or head- and then tap on OK.
• Connecting a device via USB port (p. 474)
up display, but only in the centre display. 3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view. • Settings for Android Auto* (p. 481)
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre 4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
display using the steering wheel's right-hand key-
• Connecting the car (p. 490)
on Accept to connect.
pad or voice control. A long press on the steering • Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
wheel button starts voice recognition control and compatible apps are shown.
and a short press deactivates.
5. Tap on the desired app.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
> The app starts.
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and Previously connected Android
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for 1. Connect the phone to the USB port.
Android Auto or its features or applications. > If the setting for automatic start is
When you use Android Auto, your car selected - the subview with Android Auto
transfers certain information (including its is opened and compatible apps are
location) to your connected Android phone. shown.
You are fully responsible for your and any 2. If the setting for automatic start is not
other person’s use of Android Auto. selected - open the Android Auto app from
the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
480 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Settings for Android Auto* Related information Technical specifications for media
Settings for a phone that has been connected • Android Auto* (p. 479) Compatible file formats, audio specifications
the first time with Android Auto. • Resetting settings in the settings menu and USB.
(p. 176)
Automatic start Audio files
1. Press Settings in top view. • Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
For- File extension Codec
2. Press Communication Android Auto mat
and select setting: MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
• Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto- MPEG2 Layer III,
matically when the USB cable is con- MP3 Pro (mp3
nected. compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
• Untick the box - Android Auto does not
compatible)
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected. AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored part III Audio),
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is HE-AAC (aacPlus
connected the oldest one is deleted. v1/v2)
* Option/accessory. 481
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Format File extension Max file size 4 GB Technical specification for USB
connector
AVI .avi Audio codec MP3, AC3 • Type A socket
AVI (DivX) .avi, divx Subtitles XSUB • Version 2.0
ASF .asf, .wmv Special func- Multiple subtitles, multiple • Voltage supply 5 V
tions audio, resume play • Current supply max. 2.1 A
MKV .mkv
Reference Meets all requirements of Related information
Subtitles the DivX Home Theater pro- • Media player (p. 469)
file. Visit divx.com for more
Format File extension information and software
• Media playback (p. 469)
482
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Related information
• Connect phone (p. 484)
• Connecting/disconnecting the phone
(p. 485)
• Managing phone calls (p. 486)
• Managing text messages (p. 487)
• Settings for phone (p. 489)
483
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Connect phone 3. Open the subview for phone. Option 2 - search car from phone
1. Open the subview for phone.
Connect a Bluetooth-activated phone to the car • If there is no phone connected to the car,
to make calls, send/receive messages, stream tap on Add phone. • If there is no phone connected to the car,
media and connect the car to the Internet.
• If there is a phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone Make car
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con- tap on Change . In the pop-up win- discoverable.
nected at once, in which case one of them can dow, tap on Add phone. • If there is a phone connected to the car,
only be streaming media. The most recently con- > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The tap on Change . In the pop-up win-
nected phone will automatically be connected to list is updated as new devices are dow, tap on Add phone Make car
make calls, send/receive messages, stream detected. discoverable.
media and provide an Internet connection. To
change the use of the phone, see section 4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con- 2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
"Bluetooth settings". nected.
3. To connect the car to the Internet via the
Connection is performed once per device. After 5. Check that the specified number code in the phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
connection, the Bluetooth device no longer car matches that in the phone. In which case, ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
needs to be visible/searchable but only needs to choose to accept in both places. phone.
have Bluetooth activated. To connect the car to 6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any 4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
the Internet via a phone, tethering must be acti- options for phone contacts and messages.
vated on the phone. A maximum of 20 connected > Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car. 5. Select the name of the car on the phone.
NOTE
There are two options for connecting. Either 6. Check that the specified number code in the
search the phone from the car or search the car
• The message function must be activated
in certain phones. car matches that in the external device. In
from the phone. which case, choose to accept in both places.
• Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
Option 1 - search phone from car ble and may therefore not show contacts 7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
1. Make the phone searchable/visible via and messages in the car. options for phone contacts and messages.
Bluetooth.
2. To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
484
AUDIO AND MEDIA
NOTE Connecting/disconnecting the When the phone is out of range of the car it is
phone automatically disconnected. If disconnection
• The message function must be activated
Connect, change or disconnect a connected occurs during an active call then the call can be
in certain phones. continued on the phone.
phone.
• Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
ble and may therefore not show contacts Connecting the phone automatically Changing phones
and messages in the car. It is only the two last connected phones that can 1. Open the subview for phone.
be connected automatically. 2. Press Change .
NOTE 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before set- > Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
ting the car in ignition position I.
If the phone's operating system is updated 3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
then the connection may be broken. In which To connect the car to the Internet at the
case, delete the phone from the car and then same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- Removing a phone
connect again. spot) in the phone must be activated. 1. Open the subview for phone.
2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher. 2. Press Settings Communication
Compatible phones > The phone will connect. Bluetooth Devices.
Many phones on the market now have wireless > A list of connected Bluetooth devices is
Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully Connect the phone manually displayed.
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. Tap on the phone to be removed.
support.volvocars.com. To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- 4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your
Related information spot) in the phone must be activated. selection.
• Phone (p. 483)
> The phone is no longer connected with
2. Open the subview for phone.
• Connecting/disconnecting the phone the car.
(p. 485) > Connected phones are listed.
Related information
• Bluetooth® settings (p. 489) 3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected. • Phone (p. 483)
• Managing phone calls (p. 486)
• Connect phone (p. 484)
> The phone will connect.
• Managing text messages (p. 487)
• Settings for phone (p. 489)
• Online car* (p. 490) Disconnecting the phone
– Deactivate Bluetooth on the phone. • Bluetooth® settings (p. 489)
}}
* Option/accessory. 485
AUDIO AND MEDIA
• Ignition positions (p. 411) Managing phone calls Making multi-party calls
• Online car* (p. 490) Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- During a call:
nected phone. 1. Press Add call.
2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the
parties.
5. Tap on End call to end the active call.
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multi-
Generic illustration. party call.
Making phone calls 2. Tap on End call to end the call.
1. Open the subview for phone.
Incoming phone calls
2. Select call from: call history, enter number Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis-
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is play and the centre display. Manage the call on
possible to search or browse in the contact the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the
list. Tap on in the contact list in order to centre display.
add a contact under Favourites.
1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
3. Tap on Call or .
2. Tap on End call to end the call.
4. Tap on End call to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
You can also make calls from the call log via the 1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand
2. Tap on End call to end the call.
steering wheel keypad .
486 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Private call Managing text messages Sending text messages in the centre display
– During the current call, press Privacy and Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth- 1. It is not possible to reply to a message or
select setting: connected phone. create a new message.
• Switch to mobile phone - the hands- In some phones, the message function must be • Reply to message — tap on the contact
free function is disconnected and the call activated. Not all mobile phones are compatible. whose message you wish to reply to, then
continues on your mobile phone. In such cases, they cannot display contacts and tap on Answer.
• Driver focused - the microphone in the messages in the car. For compatibility, see • To create a new message – press Create
roof on the passenger side is switched off support.volvocars.com. new and then +. Select a contact or enter
and the call continues with the car's a number.
handsfree function. Managing text messages in the centre
2. Compose the message.
display
Related information Text messages are only shown in the centre dis- 3. Press Send.
• Phone (p. 483) play if the setting is selected; see the section
"Settings for text messages". Managing text messages in the driver
• Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 123) display
Press Messages in the app
Text messages are only shown in the driver dis-
• Using the application menu in the driver dis- view to manage text messages
play if the setting is selected; see the section
play (p. 111) in the centre display.
"Settings for text messages".
• Using the keyboard in the centre display
Reading a new text message in the driver
(p. 49)
display
• Settings for phone (p. 489)
– To have the message read aloud – select
Reading a text message in the centre display Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
– Press Read out to get the message read
aloud. Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message is read aloud, a brief reply
can be created through dictation.
– Press Answer with the steering wheel key-
pad. A dictation dialogue starts. For this func-
tion to work, the car must be connected to
the Internet.
}}
487
AUDIO AND MEDIA
NOTE
Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-con-
nected phone are shown in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.
488
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory. 489
AUDIO AND MEDIA
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or car modem*.
490 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and Note that certain phones switch off tethering 1.
Customer Privacy Policy at after the contact with the car has been discon-
support.volvocars.com before connecting. nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
Connecting with Bluetooth therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it
See Connecting a phone. is used.
Connecting with Wi-Fi When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved
for future use. When the maximum number of
saved phones (50) is reached, the first con-
nected phones are deleted. To show the list of
saved networks or manually delete saved net-
works, go to Settings Communication
Wi-Fi Saved networks.
1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot- For network connection requirements, see the Fit a personal SIM card into the holder under
spot) on the mobile phone. section “Technology and security for Wi-Fi”. the cargo area floor.
2. Press Settings in top view. 2. Press Settings in top view.
Connecting with car modem*5
3. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi. When the car is connected to the Internet via the 3. Press Communication Car Modem
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this Internet.
box for Wi-Fi. connection.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
5. Tap on the network name of the network to box for Car modem Internet.
be connected. 5. If another connection source has been used
6. Enter the network password. in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
7. If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
connection. > The car connects to the network.
> The car connects to the network.
* Option/accessory. 491
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Applies to Bi-Fuel* cars Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot 2. Press Communication Car Wi-Fi
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for instal- When the car is connected to the Internet, its Hotspot.
ling a personal SIM card. Internet connection can be shared to allow other 3. Tap on Network name and name the
devices to use the Internet connection.6 shared connection.
Related information
• Online car* (p. 490) 4. Tap on Password and select a password to
• Connect phone (p. 484) be entered on connecting devices.
• Symbols in the centre display's status bar 5. Tap on Frequency band and select the fre-
(p. 45) quency on which the hotspot is to transmit
• Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 494) data. Note that selection of frequency band
is not available in all markets.
• Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 494)
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
• No or poor connection (p. 493)
box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
• Settings for car modem* (p. 494)
7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a con-
• Bluetooth® settings (p. 489) nection source, confirm the option to change
• Apple CarPlay* (p. 477) connection.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hot-
spot).
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in fur-
ther charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about the cost
The network operator (SIM card) must support for data traffic.
tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1. Press Settings in top view. Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
492 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Press Connected devices to see a list of the No or poor connection Related information
currently connected devices. Factors affecting the network. • Online car* (p. 490)
Related information The amount of data transferred is dependent on • Connecting the car (p. 490)
• Online car* (p. 490) the services or apps in use in the car. For exam-
• Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 494) ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of
data which requires a good connection and good
• Symbols in the centre display's status bar
signal strength.
(p. 45)
• No or poor connection (p. 493) Mobile phone to car
The speed of the connection may vary depending
on the location of the mobile phone in the car.
Move the mobile phone handset closer to the
centre display in order to increase the signal
strength. Ensure that there is no source of inter-
ference in between.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic, con-
tact your network operator.
* Option/accessory. 493
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Remove Wi-Fi network Wi-Fi technologies and security Settings for car modem*8
Removing a network that is not to be used. Possible network types to connect to. The car is equipped with a modem that can be
used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also
1. Press Settings in top view. It is only possible to connect to the following
possible to share the Internet connection via
types of network:
2. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi Wi-Fi.
Saved networks. • Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz7.
1. Press Settings in top view.
3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be • Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
2. Press Communication Car Modem
removed. • Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.
Internet and select settings:
4. Confirm the selection. The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
> The car will no longer connect to the net- Wi-Fi devices inside the car. • Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
work in future. If several devices operate on the frequency at the
same time then it may result in reduced perform- • Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
Remove all networks ance. counters for received and sent data volume.
All networks can be removed simultaneously by • Network
restoring factory settings. Please note that all Related information
Select network operator - automatic or
user data and system settings are reset to origi- • Online car* (p. 490)
manual selection of network operator.
nal factory settings.
• Connecting the car (p. 490)
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car
Related information • Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 492) modem will attempt to connect to the Inter-
• Online car* (p. 490) • No or poor connection (p. 493) net when the car is abroad and outside its
• Connecting the car (p. 490) home network. Note that this may result in
heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement
• Resetting settings in the settings menu
for data traffic abroad with your network pro-
(p. 176)
vider in your home country.
• SIM card PIN
494 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be Downloading, updating and 2. Select New apps in order to open a list of
entered. uninstalling apps apps that are available but not installed in
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code Once the car is connected, it is possible to the car.
shall be required for access to the SIM card. download new apps, update existing apps or 3. Tap anywhere on the row for an app in order
uninstall apps. to expand in the list and get more informa-
• Send request code — used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card. tion about the app.
Functionality depends on the provider. NOTE
4. Select Install in order to start the download
Data download may affect other services that and installation of the desired app.
Related information transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
• Online car* (p. 490) > The status of the download and installa-
on other services is experienced as disruptive tion is shown while it is in progress.
• Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 492) then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or A message is shown if a download cannot
interrupt other services. be started for the moment. The app will
remain in the list and it is possible to try to
start a download again.
NOTE
Cancelling a download
When downloading using a mobile phone, – Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-
note the data download costs. gress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled —
The apps are managed via installation cannot be cancelled once it has
Download Centre in applica- begun.
tion view.
To be able to download, update Updating apps
or uninstall apps, the car must If an app is being used during an ongoing update,
be online. it will be restarted in order for the installation to
be completed.
Downloading an app Update all
1. Open the app Download Centre. 1. Open the app Download Centre.
2. Select Install all.
> Updating is started.
}}
* Option/accessory. 495
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Update some
1. Open the app Download Centre.
2. Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3. Locate the desired app and select Install.
> Updating is started.
Uninstalling an app
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
1. Open the app Download Centre.
2. Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall
in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it dis-
appears from the list.
Related information
• Online car* (p. 490)
• Radio (p. 464)
• Media player (p. 469)
• System updates (p. 538)
496 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
License agreement for audio and Dirac Unison® DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes
media are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are
A license is an agreement granting a right to used under licence.
conduct some activity or to make use of another This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX®
person's right under the terms and conditions of Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ-
the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's ing .avi, .divx). Download free software on
agreements with manufacturers/developers. www.divx.com to create, play back and stream
Bowers & Wilkins digital video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
frequency, time and space for the best possible (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful the DivX VOD section in the device's settings
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
specific performance venues. Using advanced how to complete the registration.
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak-
ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision Patent numbers
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, Protected by one or more of the following US
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of perfect unison. 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont. DivX® Gracenote®
}}
497
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Parts of the content are copyright © of note servers will be terminated if you violate note has no obligation to provide you with new,
Gracenote or its suppliers. these restrictions. If your license is terminated improved or additional data types or categories
you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. company reserves the right to discontinue its
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote services at any time.
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote
Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun- GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote
tries. EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
will under no circumstances have any obligation
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-
Gracenote® End User License Agreement to pay you for any information you provide. You
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
This program or device contains software from agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com-
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA pany's rights under this agreement against you
INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP-
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote directly in its own name.
ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR-
("Gracenote software") activates this program to The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur- YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
music-related information, including name, artist, pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE
track and title ("Gracenote data") from online to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui- WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON-
servers or embedded databases (together called ries without knowing anything about who you are. SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
"Gracenote servers") and in order to perform Additional information is available on the web PROFITS OR REVENUES.
other actions. You may only use Gracenote data page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace-
in accordance with the intended end-user func- © Gracenote, Inc. 2009
note service.
tions for this program or this device.
The Gracenote software and everything included Sensus software
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". This software uses parts of sources from clib2
software and Gracenote servers for your own Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran- and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
personal non-commercial use. You agree not to ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv- and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
software or any Gracenote data to any third party. ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data 1993), The Regents of the University of
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT from the Gracenote servers or to change data California. All or some portions are derived from
GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE categories for any reason that Gracenote deems material licensed to the University of California by
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace- American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT. note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote herein with the permission of UNIX System
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace- servers will operate without interruption. Grace- Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
498
AUDIO AND MEDIA
source and binary forms, with or without THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
modification, are permitted provided that the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
following conditions are met: Redistributions of SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
This software is based in part on the work of the
source code must retain the above copyright CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
Independent JPEG Group.
notice, this list of conditions and the following WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must This software uses parts of sources from TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
conditions and the following disclaimer in the Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
documentation and/or other materials provided 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
with the distribution. Neither the name of the Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
contributors may be used to endorse or promote by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. sale, use or other dealings in this Software
products derived from this software without All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] without prior written authorization from Silicon
specific prior written permission. THIS Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Graphics, Inc.
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
This software is based in parts on the work of the
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND any person obtaining a copy of this software and
FreeType Team.
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, associated documentation files (the "Software"),
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE to deal in the Software without restriction, This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY including without limitation the rights to use, Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE and to permit persons to whom the Software is Linux software
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, furnished to do so, subject to the following This product contains software licensed under
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR conditions: The above copyright notice including GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, the dates of first publication and either this Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in You have the right of acquisition, modification,
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
all copies or substantial portions of the Software. and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", LGPL software.
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, You may download Source Code from the
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT following website at no charge: http://
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A download/TVM_8351_013
}}
499
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| The website provides the Source Code "As Is" PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
and without warranty of any kind. NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES and this permission notice appear in associated
assume all risk and liability associated with
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
downloading and using the Source Code and
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR each modified Data File or in the Software as
complying with the user agreements that
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; well as in the documentation associated with the
accompany each Source Code.
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
Please note that we cannot respond to any CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, has been modified.
inquiries regarding the source code. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
camellia:1.2.0 PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Corporation). All rights reserved. DAMAGE.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
Redistribution and use in source and binary Unicode: 5.1.0 NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
forms, with or without modification, are permitted COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
provided that the following conditions are met: COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
1. Redistributions of source code must retain reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
the above copyright notice, this list of http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
conditions and the following disclaimer as
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
the first lines of this file unmodified.
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
2. Redistributions in binary form must files and any associated documentation (the IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list "Data Files") or Unicode software and any OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
of conditions and the following disclaimer in associated documentation (the "Software") to OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
the documentation and/or other materials deal in the Data Files or Software without PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
provided with the distribution. restriction, including without limitation the rights SOFTWARE.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
500
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
501
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
502
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Country/
Area
Kazakh-
stan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
}}
503
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Country/
Area
China: 1.
■ 使用频率 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射 率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大 率谱密度 天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限 20 ppm
■ 帯外发射 率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射) 率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
• ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
• ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
• ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率 大发射 率(包括额外 装射频 率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业 产生有害干扰 一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采 措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微 率无线电设备,必须忍 各种无线电业 的干扰或工业 科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
504
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Country/
Area
Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards)
Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
}}
505
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan: 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司 商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率 加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應
立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信 低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
• Audio and media (p. 462)
• Media player (p. 469)
• Online car* (p. 490)
• Gracenote® (p. 472)
• Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 29)
506 * Option/accessory.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
507
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres New tyres are stored for future use. Examples of external
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, use are cracks or discoloration.
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
Wear and maintenance
wear.
Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road con-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure dition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear.
and speed rating are important for how the car To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre-
performs. vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front
and rear wheels can be switched with each other.
Recommended tyres
A suitable distance for the first change is approx.
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi-
5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals.
nal tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side
of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work-
the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there- to harden at the same time as the friction shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer-
fore important that the new tyres also have this capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For tain about tread depth. If significant differences in
marking in order for the car's driving characteris- this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between
tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main- when you replace them. This is especially impor- tyres have already occurred, then the least worn
tained. tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig- tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under-
its in the sequence mean the week and year of steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer,
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking and leads to the car continuing forwards in a
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated straight line rather than having the rear end skid-
with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre in the ding to one side, resulting in possible complete
figure was manufactured in week 07 of 2017. loss of control over the car. This is why it is
important for the rear wheels never to lose grip
Tyre age before the front wheels.
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undam- WARNING
aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
510
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory. 511
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tread wear indicators on the tyres Checking the tyre pressures pressures the tyres should have at different loads
Tread wear indicators show the status of the Tyres with the correct air pressure increase driv- and speed conditions.
tyre's tread depth. ing safety, save fuel and extend the service life of Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
the tyres. For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu- up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures
ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How-
depending on ambient temperature. Inadequate ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom-
tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, short- mended instead if optimum noise and travelling
ens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving comfort are desired.
characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure Checking the air pressure
that is too low could result in the tyres overheat- 1. Check the tyre pressures monthly. Carry out
ing and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects the check on cold tyres, which means that
travelling comfort, road noise and driving charac- the tyres should have the same temperature
teristics. as the outside temperature. After several few
Recommended tyre pressure kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation the pressure increases.
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread 2. If necessary, inflate so that the air pressure
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters corresponds with the approved tyre pressure
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread in accordance with the tyre pressure label.
depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16"), the tread will
be level in height with the tread wear indicators. NOTE
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth pro- • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
vide very poor grip in rain and snow. the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Related information • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
• Tyres (p. 510) caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which
512
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information Tyre monitoring* When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator
• Tyres (p. 510) The tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the
display and a message is shown, see also the
• Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor- Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a
heading "Message in the driver display" below.
ing system* (p. 515) warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of the
• Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
car's tyres is too low.
emergency puncture repair kit (p. 522)
• Approved tyre pressures (p. 605) If the symbol first flashes for approximately one
minute and then changes to a constant glow, it
may indicate that the system cannot detect or
warn of low tyre pressure as intended.
Symbol Specification
System description
ITPMS measures differences in rotation speed
between the different wheels via the ABS system
in order to be able to determine whether they
have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pres-
sure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed
and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By com-
paring the tyres with each other the system can
determine whether one or more tyres have pres-
}}
sure that is too low.
* Option/accessory. 513
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| General information on the tyre monitoring is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system To bear in mind
system fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym- • Always calibrate the system after a wheel
In the information below, the tyre monitoring sys- bol for low tyre pressure. When the system change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the
tem is referred to generically as TPMS. detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
will flash for about one minute and then remain pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pres-
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when sures.
checked once a month. When checking, the tyre the car is started until the fault has been rectified.
should be cold and have the air pressure recom- When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil-
• The system does not replace normal tyre
mended by the car manufacturer specified on the maintenance.
ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be
tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If affected. • There is no option to deactivate ITPMS.
the car has tyres of a different size than that rec-
ommended by the manufacturer, find out what A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea- Related information
the correct air pressure level is for these. sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or • Tyres (p. 510)
changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped • Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
functioning correctly. ing system* (p. 515)
with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
which shows when the air pressure in one or Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS • Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 517)
more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly • Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres toring* (p. 516)
as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air with TPMS.
pressure.
Messages in the driver display
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is The following messages may be shown when the
too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which indicator symbol is illuminated:
can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also
reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, • Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate
and can affect car handling and stopping ability. after fill
Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre • Tyre pressure system Temporarily
maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to unavailable
maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for • Tyre pressure system Service required.
low tyre pressure has not been reached so that
the indicator symbol illuminates. If the system cannot determine which tyre has
low pressure, all four tyres will be indicated in the
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system centre display.
fault indicator, which indicates when the system
514 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph)
monitoring system* may be required for the system to become active.
With the system for tyre monitoring, Indirect Tyre All tyres grey and a message:
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), tyre pres-
sure status can be viewed in the centre display. • Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes
Checking status and changes to constant glow after approx. 1
1. Open the Car status app in the app view. minute. The system is currently unavailable,
activated shortly.
• Tyre pressure system Service required.
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to
constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working correctly, contact an
Green tyre:
authorised Volvo workshop (recommended).
• The tyre pressure is above the limit value for
2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the a warning. Related information
tyres. Yellow tyre: • Tyre monitoring* (p. 513)
• Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 517)
• The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and
check/rectify the tyre pressure as soon as • Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the tyre pres- toring* (p. 516)
sure has been adjusted. • Car status (p. 534)
All tyres yellow:
2 The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
* Option/accessory. 515
WHEELS AND TYRES
Rectifying low tyre pressure with 3. Recalibrate the ITPMS system, see the sec- WARNING
tyre monitoring* tion "Calibrating tyre monitoring".
When the tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre
• Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
4. Drive the car at a speed above 35 km/h failure, which could result in the driver
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a (22 mph). losing control of the car.
warning, the tyre pressure in one or more of the
Note that the ITPMS symbol does not extin- • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
car's tyres is too low.
guish until the low tyre pressure has been damage in advance.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure rectified and new calibration has been per-
when the indicator symbol for ITPMS is formed.
Related information
illuminated and the message Tyre
pressure low is shown. Calibrate
• Tyre monitoring* (p. 513)
NOTE
ITPMS after the tyre pressure has been adjusted. • Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure ing system* (p. 515)
1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
a tyre pressure gauge. means the tyres are the same temperature as • Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 517)
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours • Approved tyre pressures (p. 605)
indicated on the tyre pressure label on the after the car has been driven). After a few kil- • Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
door pillar on the driver's side. ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 522)
pressure increases.
NOTE
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
516 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Calibrating tyre monitoring* 4. Open the Car status app in the app view. 8. Drive the car.
In order for the Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring Calibration is performed when the car is
System (ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph).
value for the tyre pressure must be determined. Calibration is interrupted temporarily if the
This must be performed each time the tyres are engine is switched off, but is resumed auto-
changed or the tyre pressure is changed. matically in the background when the car is
driven again.
For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre 5. Press TPMS. > When sufficient data has been collected
pressure should be adjusted in accordance with to enable the system to detect low tyre
Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol- pressure, the tyres in the centre display
lowing which, the system must be recalibrated. change colour from grey to green. The
system provides no additional confirma-
1. Switch off the car. tion that the calibration is complete.
2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in If calibration fails, a message is shown:
accordance with the tyre pressure label on Calibration unsuccessful. Please try
the door pillar on the driver's side. again..
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is NOTE
started.
Remember that the TPMS system must be
recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre
6. Press Calibrate. pressure is adjusted. New reference values
7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure must be stored for the system to work cor-
in all four tyres has been checked and rectly.
adjusted.
Related information
• Tyre monitoring* (p. 513)
• Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
3. Start the car. ing system* (p. 515)
• Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
toring* (p. 516)
* Option/accessory. 517
WHEELS AND TYRES
The puncture repair kit has limited capacity to • Store out of the reach of children.
seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do
not use the puncture repair kit on tyres that have WARNING
larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
Applies to Bi-Fuel* cars • In the event of skin contact with the seal-
The puncture repair kit is located behind the side ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi-
NOTE hatch on the left-hand side of the cargo area. ately with soap and plenty of water.
The emergency puncture repair kit is only • Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in Sealing fluid bottle
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the eye must be rinsed away immediately with
the tread. eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If
bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on
the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally the discomfort persists then the eye
hazardous waste. should be examined by a doctor.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
puncture repair has been tested and use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is Related information
approved by Volvo. performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. • Using the emergency puncture repair kit
(p. 519)
518 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Using the emergency puncture Sealing fluid bottle 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off),
repair kit and locate the electrical cable and the air
Switch hose.
Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK). 4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
Connecting
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
Overview sealing fluid bottle.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
}}
519
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- 6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap. 8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
tle holder. position I (On).
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
> The bottle and the bottle holder are the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in
equipped with a reverse catch to prevent the air hose's valve connection to the bottom WARNING
sealant leakage. When the bottle is of the tyre valve's thread. Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
the bottle holder again. Bottle removal 7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
arise then the compressor must be switched
must be performed at a workshop, Volvo 12 V socket and start the car. off immediately. The journey should not be
recommends an authorised Volvo work- continued. Call roadside assistance for recov-
shop. NOTE ery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
authorised tyre centre.
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock-
WARNING ets is in use when the compressor is operat-
• In the event of skin contact with the seal- ing. NOTE
ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately When the compressor starts, the pressure
with soap and plenty of water. WARNING can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the
• Sealing fluid that makes contact with an pressure drops after approximately
Do not leave children in the car without 30 seconds.
eye must be rinsed away immediately with supervision when the engine is running.
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the
discomfort persists then the eye should be 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
examined by a doctor.
IMPORTANT
WARNING The compressor must not be operated for
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
520
WHEELS AND TYRES
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres- 14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km 16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres- (2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h gauge.
sure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pres- the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.
• If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre
is insufficiently sealed. The journey should
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
not be continued. Call roadside assistance
high. NOTE for recovery.
WARNING
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during • If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
the first few rotations of the tyre. (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then pressure specified in accordance with the
the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey tyre pressure label on the driver's side
should not be continued. Call roadside assis- WARNING door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa). Release air
tance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo rec-
ommends an authorised tyre centre. Make sure that nobody is standing near the using the pressure reducing valve if the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto tyre pressure is too high.
them when the car is driven away. The dis-
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet). 17. If the tyre needs to be inflated:
electrical cable. 1. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and 15. Follow-up inspection 12 V socket and start the car.
refit the dust cap on the tyre. Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and 2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order screw in the valve connection to the bottom to the pressure specified in accordance
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor with the tyre pressure label.
fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area. must be switched off. 3. Switch off the compressor.
}}
521
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 18. Remove the tyre sealing equipment. Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the Inflate tyres with the compressor
Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the from the emergency puncture repair
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise kit
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
fluid. The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair
WARNING
WARNING kit.
• You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair 1. The compressor must be switched off. Make
a reverse catch to prevent leakage. kit has been used. sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
• Maximum mileage with tyres containing
19. Refit the dust cap on the tyre. sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles). 2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
• Volvo recommends visiting an authorised
NOTE Volvo workshop as soon as possible for the thread on the tyre's air valve. Check that
the pressure reducing valve on the air hose
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit inspection of the sealed tyre. The staff
is fully screwed in.
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to there can determine whether or not the
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be 3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
replaced. 12 V socket and start the car.
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew. Related information WARNING
• Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 518) Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
NOTE in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be ventilation.
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an author-
WARNING
ised Volvo workshop.
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly. 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
522
WHEELS AND TYRES
IMPORTANT 7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre. When changing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not
NOTE wheels or a spare wheel.
run for more than 10 minutes.
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit Follow the relevant instructions for removing and
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to fitting wheels.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
the tyre pressure label on the driver side door
pillar. Release air using the pressure reduc- • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust When changing to another tyre
ing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. caps can rust and become difficult to dimension
unscrew. Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat-
Related information ing the software at each change of tyre dimen-
• Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 518) sion. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimen-
• Approved tyre pressures (p. 605)
sions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
• Removing a wheel (p. 524)
• Fitting the wheels (p. 525)
• Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 602)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable. • Tool kit (p. 528)
• Winter wheels (p. 527)
• Spare wheel* (p. 526)
• Wheel bolts (p. 526)
* Option/accessory. 523
WHEELS AND TYRES
524 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING Crank up the jack* so that it makes contact Fitting the wheels
with the car's jacking point. Check that the Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing
Never position anything between the ground head of the jack is correctly positioned in the
and the jack, nor between the jack and the wheels.
jacking point so that the bump in the centre
car's jacking point.
of the head fits into the jacking point hole WARNING
and the base is positioned vertically below
the jacking point. Also make sure you turn Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
IMPORTANT the jack.
the jack so that the crank is as far away from
The ground must be firm, smooth and level. Passengers must leave the car when it is
the side of the car as possible, at which point
the jack's arms are perpendicular to the raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
8. When raising the car, it is important that the direction of the car. changed in a trafficked environment, passen-
jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended gers must stand in a safe place.
points on the car's underbody. The triangle WARNING
markings in the plastic cover indicate the 1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
locations of the jacking/lifting points. There Never crawl under the car when it is raised on and hub.
are two jacking points on each side of the the jack.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
car. There is a recess for the jack at each Passengers must leave the car when it is thoroughly.
point. raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passen- Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
gers must stand in a safe place. wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove rotate.
the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Related information
• When changing wheels (p. 523)
• Raise the car (p. 539)
• Fitting the wheels (p. 525)
• Tool kit (p. 528)
}}
* Option/accessory. 525
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor- Wheel bolts Spare wheel*
tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop- Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can
erly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check hubs. be used to temporarily replace a punctured nor-
the tightening torque with a torque wrench. mal wheel.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose
tightening may damage the nuts and the
bolts.
526 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
• Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre 3. Screw in the foam block using the mounting Winter wheels
pressure for the spare wheel. screws and then fold down the cargo area Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con-
• On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear floor. ditions.
axle can be disconnected. 4. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
• If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, it
Related information dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
is not possible to use snow chains at the engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
same time. • Removing a wheel (p. 524)
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
• The spare wheel must not be repaired. • Fitting the wheels (p. 525) wheels.
• Tool kit (p. 528)
IMPORTANT
• Jack* (p. 529) NOTE
• Never drive faster than 80 km/h
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
(50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.
wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.
• The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
Taking out the spare wheel mark which side of the car they were mounted
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear on, for example L for left and R for right.
and forwards.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools. 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
4. Lift out the spare wheel. the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
Storing the punctured tyre
1. Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam NOTE
block and put the wheel in the bag.
The legal provisions for the use of studded
2. Put the tools back in their right place in the tyres vary from country to country.
foam block and lift it back into the car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 527
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information
• When changing wheels (p. 523)
528 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory. 529
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Applies to cars with level control* First aid kit Dimension designation for wheel
If the car is equipped with air suspension then The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. rim
this must be deactivated before the car is raised Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
with the jack. Store the first aid kit in the space on the right- accordance with the examples in the table
hand side in the cargo area. below.
Switch off the function via the centre display:
1. Press on Settings in the top view. Related information The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
• Tool kit (p. 528) with certain combinations of wheel rims and
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and tyres.
Suspension.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for
3. Select Disable Leveling Control. example: 8.5Jx19x47.5.
Related information 8.5 Rim width in inches
• Tool kit (p. 528)
J Rim flange profile
• Raise the car (p. 539)
19 Rim diameter in inches
47,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
Related information
• Tyres (p. 510)
• Dimension designation for tyre (p. 531)
• Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 602)
530 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
531
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
534 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Changing contact address Filling in and sending an appointment 7. Press the Send appointment request but-
If you would like to change to another e-mail request. ton.
address, you can contact a Volvo dealer. > You will receive an appointment sugges-
Selecting a Volvo dealer tion to your car within a couple of days.4.
Select the Volvo dealer you would like to contact You will also receive the same communi-
for service and repairs by going to cation via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and logging in. www.volvocars.com and log in.
Prerequisite for booking from car In certain markets, once you have sent the
For the car to send and receive booking informa- 1. Open the Car status app from the app view appointment request, the message that
tion, it must be connected to the Internet, see in the centre display. the car needs service is extinguished in
section "Online car". 2. the driver display.
Press the Appointments button.
Using the service 8. Press the Cancel request button to cancel
3. Press the Request appointment button.
When it is time for service, and in some cases your request.
4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled
when the car is in need of repair, a message will The appointment request contains vehicle data
in.
appear in the driver display and at the top of the when it is sent from your car to the workshop via
centre display. The service date is determined by 5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is your Internet connection. This information facili-
how much time has passed, hours that the filled in. tates planning for the workshop.
engine has been running, or distance driven 6. Fill in information for the workshop in the
since the last service.
field Tap to write information to the
Book service or repair workshop, e.g. if there is anything you would
Fill in the appointment request when desired or like done during the workshop visit or any
when a message stating that service or repairs other important information to your work-
are needed is shown in the driver display and at shop.
the top of the centre display.
535
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
536 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
• System updates (p. 538)
• Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 495)
* Option/accessory. 537
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
System updates NOTE Note that only the download can be cancelled,
System updates are intended for the Internet- when the installation phase has started, this can-
Data download may affect other services that not be cancelled.
connected and infotainment components of the
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
car. If system software updates are available, the
on other services is experienced as disruptive Background search for software
updates can be made all at once or one at a
time.
then the download can be interrupted. Alter- updates
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or The function can be deactivated via the centre
System updates are handled interrupt other services. display:
via the Download Centre app 1. Press Settings in the top view.
in the centre display's applica-
tion view. A tap on the button
NOTE 2. Press System Download Centre.
starts a download application in An update can be interrupted when the igni-
3. Deselect Auto Software Update.
the home view's bottom sub- tion is switched off and the car is left.
view. If no search for available If an update is available, the message New
However, the update does not have to be
updates has been performed since the last time completed before the car is left, this is software updates available is shown in the
the infotainment system was started, a search is because the update is resumed the next time centre display's status bar. A tap on the message
performed. No search is performed if a software the car is used. starts a download application in the home view's
installation is in progress. An icon in the down- bottom subview. As soon as the download appli-
load application's button System updates cation has started, an icon in the download appli-
shows how many updates are available. A tap on Update all system software cation's button System updates shows how
the button shows a list of updates that can be – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. many updates are available.
installed in the car. For more information and If no list is desired, then Install all can be
answers to common questions regarding function Related information
selected at the System updates button instead.
and to download certain system updates, go in to • Online car* (p. 490)
support.volvocars.com. Update individual system software • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
For system updates to be possible, the car must programs (p. 495)
be connected to the Internet, see section "Online – Select Install for the software required. • Remote updates (p. 537)
car".
Cancelling the download
Searching for software updates is activated when – Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
the car is supplied from the factory. replaced the button Install at the start of the
download.
538 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
}}
* Option/accessory. 539
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a workshop jack, it must
be positioned under one of the four lifting points.
Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Make sure
the jack plate is equipped with a rubber pad so
that the car will be stable and not be damaged.
Always use axle stands or similar.
Related information
• When changing wheels (p. 523)
• Jack* (p. 529)
540 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning sig-
nal is heard despite the bonnet being closed
properly, contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
}}
541
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
542
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine oil IMPORTANT texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact
An approved engine oil must be used in order a Volvo dealer for more information.
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
that the recommended service intervals can be Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
applied. with the intervals specified in the Service and
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been Warranty Booklet.
made very carefully with regard to service life, Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per-
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions,
environmental impact. Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade
An approved engine oil must be used in order than the one specified.
that the recommended service intervals can
Related information
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
• Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 544)
is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
impact of the car being affected. (p. 595)
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis- • Engine oil — specifications (p. 593)
Volvo recommends: cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
543
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
Check the oil level The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge in the centre display when the engine
is switched off.
Filler pipe9.
The oil level should be checked regularly.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
NOTE
No action with regard to engine oil level needs to
be taken until a message is shown in the driver 1. Open the Car status app from the app view The system cannot directly detect changes
display. in the centre display. when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km (approx.
2. Press Status to show the oil level.
20 miles) and have been stationary for
WARNING 5 minutes with the engine switched off and
If this symbol is shown together on level ground before the oil level indication
with the message Engine oil level is correct.
Service required, visit a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
544
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
545
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
• Coolant — specifications (p. 596)
546
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo recommends that you contact an author- An LED10 type lamp must be replaced by a
ised Volvo workshop. workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be
WARNING replaced without the help of a workshop, but the
plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed
The air conditioning system contains pressur- before a bulb can be replaced.
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop. NOTE
For information about bulbs not covered in
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certi-
fied Volvo service technician.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
547
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| The reversing lamp bulb and the rear fog lamp NOTE
bulb can be replaced without assistance from a
workshop. Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
Contact a workshop11 if there is a fault in bulbs the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
other than the bulbs in the halogen headlamps, rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
the reversing lamp bulb or the rear fog lamp bulb. Condensation is normally vented out of the
If a fault occurs in LED12 lamps, the entire lamp lamp housing when the lamp has been
unit usually must be replaced. switched on for a time.
548
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fog lamp
Reversing lamp
Indicator13
Brake light (LED)
Left-hand headlamp.
Brake light - central, high-level (LED)
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
dipped beam bulb.
* Option/accessory. 549
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| 2. Unplug the connector from the bulb. Replacing the main beam lamp 3. Carefully prize the plastic cover at the con-
The main beam lamp in halogen headlamps can nector's lock lug so that the lock lug relea-
3. Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards
be replaced by the driver. ses.
and pulling it straight out.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
pin must be aimed straight upwards. cover over the headlamp must be removed; see 5. Replace the bulb.
5. Press in the connector. the section "Bulb replacement". 6. Fit the bulb in the socket and screw in.
6. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover. 7. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
IMPORTANT
Related information Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with Related information
• Bulb replacement (p. 547) your fingers. Grease from your fingers is • Bulb replacement (p. 547)
• Bulb specifications (p. 553) vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector • Bulb specifications (p. 553)
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
main beam bulb.
2. Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling straight out.
550
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
The bulb for the daytime running light/posi-
Left-hand headlamp.
tion lamp is easier to access if the main beam
bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted 1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
diagonally above the daytime running light daytime running light bulb/position lamp
bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main bulb.
beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards 2. Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running
and then pulling straight out. light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out.
3. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
4. Replace the bulb. Left-hand headlamp.
5. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press 1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
it into place. indicator bulb.
6. If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been 2. Press the catches together and pull the bulb
removed, fit it into the socket and screw in. holder straight out.
7. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover. 3. Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb.
4. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
Related information it into place.
• Bulb replacement (p. 547)
5. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
• Bulb specifications (p. 553)
}}
551
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
• Bulb replacement (p. 547)
• Bulb specifications (p. 553)
552
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function WA Type
Dipped beam 55 H7
Main beam 65 H9
Front direction indicators 24 PY24W
Lamp housing on left-hand side.
daytime running lights/ 21/5 W21/5W
2. Undo the bulb holder by turning it a quarter
position lamps, front
turn anticlockwise and pulling it out.
3. Remove the blown bulb from the bulb holder Reversing lamp 21 H21W LL
by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise. Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
The tailgate's inner panel.
4. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
1. Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate clockwise.
A Watt
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
anticlockwise. Then unhook the panel and
5. Wipe the bulb's lens clean of any dirt, grease Related information
place it to one side.
or moisture. • Bulb replacement (p. 547)
6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it a quarter
turn clockwise.
7. Refit the panel and lock it on by turning the
knobs a quarter turn clockwise.
Related information
• Bulb replacement (p. 547)
• Bulb specifications (p. 553)
553
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Wiper blades in service position are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated Related information
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service via the function view: • Replacing a wiper blade (p. 555)
position (vertical position) when, for example, Press the Wiper Service • Filling washer fluid (p. 556)
they are being replaced. Position button. The light indi- • Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
cator in the button illuminates
when the service position is • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 153)
activated. Upon activation, the
wipers move to standing
straight up. To deactivate the
service mode, press Wiper Service Position
again. The light indicator in the button extin-
guishes when the service position is deactivated.
554
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
555
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Replacing the wiper blade, rear window Related information Filling washer fluid
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 554) Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 575) as well as the windscreen and rear window.
Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when
the temperature is under the freezing point.
556 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
557
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| IMPORTANT NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed The life of the battery is shortened if it
then the energy saving function for infotain- becomes discharged repeatedly.
ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or
The life of the battery is affected by several
the message in the driver display about the
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
starter battery's state of charge may be tem-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
porarily inapplicable, following the connection
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
of an external starter battery or battery
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
charger:
time or when it is only driven short distances.
• The negative battery terminal on the car's Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
starter battery must never be used for
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
Positive charging point connecting an external starter battery or
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
battery charger - only the car's negative
mended or that the battery is connected to a
Negative charging point charging point may be used as the
battery charger with automatic trickle charg-
grounding point.
ing.
IMPORTANT A battery that is kept fully charged has a
When charging the starter battery and the maximum service life.
support battery, only use a modern battery
charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast
charging function must not be used since it
may damage the battery.
558
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
The starter battery is located in the cargo area. battery, a battery of AGM16 type must be fit-
ted.
The following table shows specifications for the
starter battery.
IMPORTANT
Battery If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
H7 AGM you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
Voltage (V) 12 battery (see the label on the battery).
Cold start
capacityA - CCAB 800 NOTE
(A)
The starter battery's container size must be
Size , L×W×H 315×175×190 consistent with the dimensions for the origi-
(mm) (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches) nal battery.
Capacity (Ah) 80
A According to EN standard.
B Cold Cranking Amperes.
559
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
560
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
561
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
• Using jump starting with another battery Fuses Location of central electrical units
(p. 414) All electrical functions and components are pro-
• Symbols on the batteries (p. 560) tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
If an electrical component or function does not Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
work, it may be because the component's fuse drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an Engine compartment
authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Related information
• Replacing a fuse (p. 563)
562
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
Related information
• Fuses (p. 562)
• Fuses in engine compartment (p. 564)
• Fuses under glovebox (p. 567)
• Fuses in cargo area (p. 571)
563
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
564
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that Function Function
AA AA
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses. Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve 7.5 Starter motor 40
The fuse box also provides space for several for output pulse (diesel)
Starter motor Shunt
spare fuses. Engine control module; Actuator; 20
Throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel); Control module for vehicle gas*B 15*B
Positions
Position sensor for turbo (die-
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30
sel); Valve for turbocharger (pet-
the location of the fuses.
rol) - -
• Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37 and 46-54 are of
the "Micro" type. Engine Control Module (ECM) 5 - -
• Fuses 31-34 and 38-45 are of the "MCase" - - - -
type and should be replaced by a work-
shop19. Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Ther- 10 - -
mostat for engine cooling sys-
Function AA tem (petrol); EGR cooling pump - -
(diesel); Glow control module
- -
(diesel) - -
- - Control module for spoiler roller 5 - -
cover; Control module for radia-
- -
tor roller cover; Relay coils for 12 V socket in tunnel console, 15
Ignition coils (petrol); Spark 15 output pulse (diesel) front
plugs (petrol) Heating of lambda probe*B; 15*B 12 V socket in tunnel console, 15
Solenoid for engine oil pump; 15 Control module for vehicle gas*B by legroom for second seat row
15
Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda Lambda-sond, front; Lambda- 12 V socket in cargo area* 15
sond, centre (petrol); Lambda sond, rear (petrol)
sond, rear (diesel) - -
Engine Control Module (ECM) 20
* Option/accessory. 565
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
566 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
567
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that The fuse box in the engine compartment also
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting provides space for several spare fuses.
of fuses.
568
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Sun sensor 5 - -
Fan module for climate control sys- 40
tem, front Humidity sensor 5
- -
USB HUB 5
- - Door module in right-hand rear 20
door
Steering wheel module 5
Fuses in cargo area 10
* Option/accessory. 569
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Function AA Function AA
Control module for online con- 5 Door module in left-hand front door 20
nected car: Control module for
Volvo On Call Control module for suspension 20
(active chassis)*
Door module in left-hand rear door 20
- -
Audio control module (amplifier) 40
(certain variants) Sensus control module 10
- - - -
Control module for fuel pump 15 Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15
- - A Ampere
- - Related information
• Replacing a fuse (p. 563)
Seat heating, driver's side front 15
• Fuses in engine compartment (p. 564)
Seat heating, passenger side front 15 • Fuses in cargo area (p. 571)
Coolant pump 10
- -
570 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory. 571
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
572
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory. 573
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Related information
• Replacing a fuse (p. 563)
• Fuses under glovebox (p. 567)
• Fuses in engine compartment (p. 564)
574
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the exterior • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and NOTE
The car should be washed as soon as it plenty of lukewarm water.
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. solution or car shampoo.
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of Condensation is normally vented out of the
separator. Use car shampoo. water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce lamp housing when the lamp has been
Handwashing the risk of water drying stains which may switched on for a time.
The following steps are good to remember when need to be polished out.
washing the car: • After the car has been washed, tar from
IMPORTANT
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get
• Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This
rid of the last spots after the car has been • Make sure that the panoramic roof and
can cause the detergent or wax to dry and
washed. sun visor are closed before washing the
have an abrasive effect.
car.
• Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
WARNING • Never use polishing agent with abrasive
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- properties on the panoramic roof.
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. For example, use soft paper or shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. • Never use wax on the rubber mouldings
sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author- around the panoramic roof.
ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the IMPORTANT
removal of any discoloration.
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. IMPORTANT
• Wash the underbody, including wheel hous- Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling. Remember to remove dirt from the drain
ings and bumpers.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but holes in the doors and in the sills after wash-
• Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
use water and a non-scratching sponge ing the car.
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of
instead.
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks. Automatic car wash
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on of washing the car, but it cannot reach every-
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the where. Washing the car by hand is recommended
surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
}}
575
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto- 5. Switch off the engine by turning the start WARNING
matic car washes with washing by hand. knob in the tunnel console clockwise. Hold
the knob in place at least 4 seconds. Always test the brakes after washing the car,
including the parking brake, to ensure that
NOTE > The car is ready for the automatic car moisture and corrosion do not attack the
wash. brake linings and reduce braking perform-
The car must only be washed by hand over
the first few months. This is because the paint ance.
is more delicate when it is new. IMPORTANT
• Before washing the car, make sure that Wiper blades
the automatic rain sensor is deactivated, Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
IMPORTANT well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
otherwise there is the risk of it starting
Before driving the car into an automatic car and damaging the wiper arms. the service life of wiper blades.
wash, deactivate the functions for automatic
braking when stationary and automatic park-
• Make sure that the door mirrors are When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured, position.
ing brake application. If these functions are antennas retracted or removed, otherwise
not deactivated, the brake system will jam they risk being damaged by the auto-
when the car is stationary and the car will not
NOTE
matic car wash.
be able to move. Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu-
larly with a lukewarm soap solution or car
High-pressure washing shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
In car washes where the car is towed through
When using high-pressure washing, use sweep-
with rolling wheels, the following applies:
ing movements and make sure that the nozzle
1. Drive into the automatic car wash.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface
of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks. components
2. Deactivate the function for Automatic brak- A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
ing when stationary using the switch in the Testing the brakes dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
tunnel console. Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
3. Deactivate the function for automatic appli- when driving long distances in rain or slush. The components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When
cation of parking brake via the centre dis- heat from the friction causes the brake linings to using such a cleaning agent the instructions
play's top view. warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting must be followed carefully.
in very damp or cold weather. Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH
4. Move the gear lever to position N.
value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause
discolouration of anodised aluminium compo-
576
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory. 577
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
578
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
mended by Volvo dealers.
* Option/accessory. 579
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the centre display. Do not use win-
dow cleaning agent, other cleaning agents,
aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
cleaning agent containing abrasive.
Home button for the centre display. Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis-
1. Turn off the centre display with a long press sue paper, these can scratch the centre dis-
on the home button. play.
2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
supplied or use another microfibre cloth of Related information
equivalent quality. The screen should be • Cleaning the interior (p. 578)
wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth • Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
with small circular movements. If necessary,
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
3. Activate the display with a short press on the
home button.
580
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
22 If required.
23 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick. }}
581
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
• Paint damage (p. 581)
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 575)
• Type designations (p. 584)
582
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information such
as chassis number, type designation, colour
code, etc.
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden-
tification and engine numbers can facilitate all
contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
584
SPECIFICATIONS
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica- Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant Decal for engine code and the engine's serial
tion number, permissible maximum weights and R134a. number.
code designation for exterior colour and type
approval number. The decal is positioned on the
door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand
rear door is opened.
}}
585
SPECIFICATIONS
|| NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
586
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
587
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Dimensions mm inches
L Width including door 2019 79.5
mirrors
M Width including folded- 1895 74,6
in door mirrors
A For kerb weight + 2 people. Varies slightly depending on tyre
dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).
B Applies to cars with 17/18 inch wheels.
C Applies to cars with 19 inch wheels.
D Applies to cars with 20 inch wheels.
E Applies to cars with 21 inch wheels.
F Body width.
G At door mouldings.
588
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights NOTE
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
label in the car.
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank extra equipment or accessories. This means
90% full and all fluids. that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
The weight of passengers and accessories, and by the weight of the accessory.
towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence
the load capacity and are not included in the kerb Examples of accessories that reduce load
weight. capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - as other accessories such as towbar, load
Kerb weight. carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc. Max. gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. train weight (car+trailer)
taining the kerb weight of your own particular
car. Max. front axle load
Related information
• Type designations (p. 584)
• Towing capacity and towball load (p. 590)
589
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
1800B
T6 AWD B4204T27 Automatic 110
2200C
D3 D4204T9 Manual select 1800 110
D3 D4204T9 Automatic 1800 110
1800B
D3 AWD D4204T4 Automatic 110
2200C
D4 D4204T14 Manual select 1800 110
D4 D4204T14 Automatic 1800 110
590
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
1800B
D4 AWD D4204T14 Automatic 110
2200C
1800B
D5 AWD D4204T23 Automatic 110
2200C
A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
B Applies to cars that are not equipped for a higher towing weight.
C Applies to cars that are equipped for a higher towing weight.
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to
exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight
(including towball load) by a maximum of 100
kg, provided that speed is limited to 100
km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements
for the vehicle combination, such as speed,
etc. must be observed.
* Option/accessory. 591
SPECIFICATIONS
Related information
• Type designations (p. 584)
• Engine oil — specifications (p. 593)
• Coolant — specifications (p. 596)
592
SPECIFICATIONS
Volvo recommends:
}}
593
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Related information
• Type designations (p. 584)
• Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 595)
• Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 544)
• Engine oil (p. 543)
594
SPECIFICATIONS
Related information
• Engine oil — specifications (p. 593)
• Engine oil (p. 543)
595
SPECIFICATIONS
Related information
• Engine compartment overview (p. 542)
596
SPECIFICATIONS
Related information
• Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 443)
}}
597
SPECIFICATIONS
650 g R1234yf
Related information
Lubricant type • Servicing the climate control system (p. 547)
WARNING • Type designations (p. 584)
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
A trained and certified technician is SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
required in order to service the Service and Containment of Refrigerants
mobile air conditioning system Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
(MAC) repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
Flammable refrigerants in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
Refrigerant
60 ml (2.03 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
Cars with refrigerant R134a
Weight Prescribed grade
700 g (1.54 lbs) R134a
598
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
599
SPECIFICATIONS
||
The fuel consumption and emission values in the • If the car is equipped with extra equipment A combination of the examples above could
above table are based on special EU driving that affects its weight. increase consumption considerably.
cycles (see below), which apply for cars with kerb • Driving style. There may be huge deviations in fuel consump-
weight in basic version and without extra equip-
• If the customer chooses wheels other than tion if comparing to the EU driving cycles (see
ment. The car's weight may increase depending
those mounted as standard on the basic ver- below), which are used in the certification of the
on its equipment level. This, along with how heav-
sion of the model, as this could increase roll- car and on which consumption figures in the
ily the car is loaded, increases its fuel consump-
ing resistance. table are based. For further information, please
tion and CO2 emissions.
refer to the referenced regulations.
There are several reasons for fuel consumption
• High speed causes increased air resistance.
that is higher than the values in the table. Exam- • Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
ples of these include: weather and the condition of the car.
600
SPECIFICATIONS
601
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved wheel and tyre sizes documents. The following table shows all ✓ = Approved
In certain countries not all approved sizes are approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
indicated by the registration document or other
602 * Option/accessory.
SPECIFICATIONS
Related information
• Load index and speed rating (p. 604)
• Type designations (p. 584)
• Dimension designation for tyre (p. 531)
• Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 530)
603
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine man/ Minimum permitted load index (LI)A Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
aut
T4 B4204T44 aut 96 V
T5/Bi-Fuel B4204T23 aut 96 V
T6 AWD B4204T27 aut 96 W
D3 D4204T9 man 96 H
D3 D4204T9 aut 96 H
D3 AWD D4204T4 aut 96 H
D4 D4204T14 man 96 V
D4 D4204T14 aut 96 V
D4 AWD D4204T14 aut 96 V
D5 AWD D4204T23 aut 96 V
A The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
B The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
604
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
(km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
Related information
• Type designations (p. 584)
• Checking the tyre pressures (p. 512)
• Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 602)
605
ALPHABETICAL INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A/C (Air conditioning) 192 location 242 All Wheel Drive, (AWD) 431
607
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
608
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Catalytic converter City Safety™ 344, 347, 348, 352, 355 Collision warning system
Recovery 460 Cleaning Pedestrian detection 348
CD player 473 automatic car wash 575 Radar sensor 330
central locking 247 car washing 575 Colour code, paint 581
centre display 580 Combined instrument panel 94
Centre display
Fabric upholstery 578 settings 98
change settings 46
rims 577
cleaning 580 Compass 159
seatbelts 579
climate control 189 calibration 160
upholstery 578
Keyboard 49, 53 Condensation in headlamps 575
messages 112 Clean Zone Interior Package 187
Controls lighting 138
operation 36, 40 Climate control 184, 188
overview 33 auto-regulation 191 Coolant 596
symbols in status bar 45 centre display 189 Coolant, filling 545
Checking the engine oil level 544 experienced temperature 185 Cooling system
fan control 195 overheating 440
Child safety 73
Parking 208
Child safety locks 264 Cornering lights 145
rear seat 190
Child seat 73, 74 sensors 185 Corner Traction Control 278
integrated child seat 85 temperature control 193 Cover
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 80 voice control 124 cargo area 231
lower mounting points 77 zones 184 Crash, see Collision 58
positioning/fitting 74 Climate control system Cross Traffic Alert – CTA 359, 360, 361
table for location 78 Refrigerant 597
table of i-Size 84 Cruise control 290, 291
Clock, adjustment 103 deactivate 294
table of ISOFIX 81
Upper mounting points 76 CO2 emissions 599 managing speed 291, 292
Collision 58, 61, 65, 72 temporary deactivation 293
City Safety in crossing traffic 350
Collision warning 344 CTA – Cross Traffic Alert 359, 360, 361
City Safety with obstructed evasive
manoeuvre 351 Cyclist detection 348
609
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 187 Distance Warning 295, 296
Limitations 297
E
Door mirrors 156 ECO mode 428
610
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
611
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
612
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring Lane assistance position lamps 139
System 513, 515, 516, 517 operation 375 rear fog lamp 145
Lane assistance – Lane Keeping Aid Lighting, bulb replacement 547
(LKA) 372, 375, 376 daytime running lights/position lamps
J Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 372, 375, 376 front 551
dipped beam 549
Jack 529 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 579
direction indicators front 551
Journey statistics 171 Level control 431 main beam 550
Jump starting 414 License agreement 497 rear fog lamp 553
Lifting tool 529 Reversing lamp 552
613
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
614
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
615
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
616
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Skidding 442, 443 Steering assistance at risk of head-on colli- Switch off engine 413
Ski hatch 230 sion 382 Symbols
slippery driving conditions 443 Steering assistance at risk of rear-end col- indicator symbols 99
lision 383 Symbols and messages
Soot filter 449
Steering force, speed related 278 Adaptive Cruise Control 313
spare wheel 526
Steering force level, see Steering force 278 centre display status field 45
Speed camera 368 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 355
Steering lock 414
Speed limiter 283, 287 parking climate 214
deactivation 286 Steering wheel 135, 136
Symbols and messages for Assistance at
getting started 284 heating 207
risk of collision 379
temporary deactivation 285 keypad 135
paddle 135 System
Speed ratings, tyres 531 updates 538
steering wheel adjustment 136
Spin control 278
Steering wheel paddles 421
Stabiliser
Stickers
trailer 457
location of 584 T
Stability and traction control system 278, 281
Stone chips and scratches 581 Tailgate
operation 279
Stop/start function 422 Locking/unlocking 250, 252
Stability system 278 opening/closing with foot movement 258
Storage spaces 220
Stains 578 power 255, 258
glovebox 226
Start/Stop 422, 424 tunnel console 220 Temperature
function and operation 422 Control 193
Sun blind
the engine does not stop 424 experienced 185
panorama roof 161
Starting the engine 412 Rear door 156 Temporary spare
after collision 72 spare wheel 526
Sun visor 227
Start the car 412 Through-load hatch 230
Support battery 560
Steering assistance at risk of collision 378 Tools 458, 528
Switching off the engine 413
617
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
618
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
619
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
620
TP 23202 (English), AT 1717, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation